Freescale Semiconductor Data Sheet: Advance Information Document Number: IMX51AEC Rev. 2, 06/2010 IMX51A Package Information Plastic Package Case 2017 19 x 19 mm, 0.8 mm pitch i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors Ordering Information See Table 1 on page 2 for ordering information. 1 Introduction The MCIMX51A (i.MX51A) Automotive Infotainment Processor represents Freescale Semiconductor’s latest addition to a growing family of multimedia focused products offering high performance processing with a high degree of functional integration, aimed at the growing automotive infotainment market. This device includes two graphics processors, 720p video processing, dual display, and many I/Os. The i.MX51A processor features Freescale’s advanced implementation of the ARM Cortex A8™ core, targeting speeds up to 600 MHz with 200 MHz I/O bus clock DDR2 and mobileDDR. This device is well-suited for graphics rendering for HMI and navigation, high performance speech processing with large databases, video processing and display, audio playback and ripping, and many other applications. 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1. Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.2. Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2. Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.1. Special Signal Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 3. IOMUX Configuration for Boot Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3.1. NAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3.2. SD/MMC IOMUX Pin Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3.3. I2C IOMUX Pin Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3.4. eCSPI/CSPI IOMUX Pin Configuration . . . . . . . . 15 3.5. Wireless External Interface Module (WEIM) . . . . 15 3.6. UART IOMUX Pin Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3.7. USB-OTG IOMUX Pin Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 15 4. Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 4.1. Chip-Level Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 4.2. Supply Power-Up/Power-Down Requirements and Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 4.3. I/O DC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 4.4. Output Buffer Impedance Characteristics . . . . . . 28 4.5. I/O AC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 4.6. Module Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 4.7. External Peripheral Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 5. Package Information and Contact Assignments . . . . . 147 5.1. 19 x 19 mm Package Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 5.2. 19 x 19 mm, 0.8 Pitch Ball Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 6. Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 This document contains information on a new product. Specifications and information herein are subject to change without notice. © Freescale Semiconductor, Inc., 2009-2010. All rights reserved. Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Introduction Features of the i.MX51A processor include the following: • Smart Speed Technology—The i.MX51A device has power management throughout the IC that enables the rich suite of multimedia feature and peripherals to achieve minimum power consumption in both active and various low power modes. Smart Speed Technology enables the designer to deliver a feature-rich product that requires levels of power that are far less than industry expectations. • Multimedia—The multimedia performance of the ARM Cortex A8 is enhanced with a multi-level cache system, a Multi-standard Hardware Video CODECs, autonomous image processing unit, multi-standard audio CODECs, Neon (an advanced SIMD, 32 bit single-precision floating point support and vector floating point co-processor), and a programmable smart DMA controller. • Powerful Graphics Acceleration—The i.MX51A processor has an integrated Graphics Processing Unit which includes an OpenGl 2.0 GPU that provides 27Mtri/sec, 166Mpix/s, and 664Mpix/s z-plane performance. Silicon version 2.0 of the i.MX51A device includes an independent OpenVG GPU operating at166Mpix/s. • Interface Flexibility—The i.MX51A processor supports connections to all popular types of external memories: mobile DDR, DDR2, PSRAM, NOR Flash, NAND Flash (MLC and SLC), and OneNAND (managed NAND). The i.MX51A processor also includes a rich multimedia suite of interfaces: LCD controller for two displays, CMOS sensor interface, High-Speed USB On-The-Go plus three High-Speed USB hosts, high-speed MMC/SDIO, Fast Ethernet controller, UART, I2C, I2S (SSI), and others. 1.1 Ordering Information Table 1 provides the ordering information. Table 1. Ordering Information Part Number Mask Set Features Junction Temperature Range (°C) Package1 MCIMX514AJM6C M77X No hardware video codecs –40 to 125 19 x 19 mm, 0.8 mm pitch BGA Case 2017 MCIMX516AJM6C M77X Full specification –40 to 125 19 x 19 mm, 0.8 mm pitch BGA Case 2017 1 Case 2017 and Case 2058 are RoHS compliant, lead-free, MSL = 3. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 2 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Introduction 1.2 Block Diagram NOR/Nand Battery Ctrl Device Flash DDR Memory Digital Audio USB Dev/Host USB PHY External Memory I/F Camera 1 Camera 2 LCD Display 1 LCD Display 2 TV-Out Figure 1 shows the functional modules of the processor. ATA HDD Application Processor Domain (AP) TV Encoder Image Processing Subsystem USB OTG + 3 HS Ports AP Peripherals eCSPI (2) CSPI Ethernet Smart DMA (SDMA) UART (3) AUDMUX GPS Internal RAM (128 Kbytes) SDMA Peripherals eSDHC (4) SSI UART eCSPI (1 of 2) SPDIF Tx SIM FEC P-ATA Boot ROM RF/IF ICs Security SAHARA Lite RTIC AXI and AHB Switch Fabric SPBA SCC ARM Cortex A8 Platform I2C(2),HSI2C ARM Cortex A8 PWM (2) 1-WIRE Neon and VFP IIM L1 I/D cache IOMUXC L2 cache KPP ETM, CTI0,1 GPIOx32 (4) SJC SSI (3) Video Proc. Unit (VPU) FIRI Debug 3D Graphics Proc Unit (GPU) SRTC CSU DAP TPIU SIM CTI (2) TZIC Fuse Box Graphics Memory (128 Kbytes) Timers WDOG (2) Clock and Reset PLL (3) CCM Audio/Power Management GPC GPT 2D Graphics Proc Unit (GPU2D) EPIT (2) JTAG IrDA XVR Bluetooth WLAN USB-OTG XVR MMC/SDIO SRC XTALOSC CAMP (2) Keypad Access. Conn. Figure 1. Functional Block Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 3 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Features 2 Features The i.MX51A processor contains a large number of digital and analog modules that are described in Table 2. Table 2. i.MX51A Digital and Analog Modules Block Mnemonic 1-WIRE Block Name 1-Wire Interface Subsystem Connectivity Peripherals Brief Description 1-Wire support provided for interfacing with an on-board EEPROM, and smart battery interfaces, for example: Dallas DS2502. ARM Cortex A8™ ARM Cortex ARM A8™ Platform The ARM Cortex A8™ Core Platform consists of the ARM Cortex A8™ processor version r2p5 (with TrustZone) and its essential sub-blocks. It contains the Level 2 Cache Controller, 32-Kbyte L1 instruction cache, 32-Kbyte L1 data cache, and a 256-Kbyte L2 cache. The platform also contains an Event Monitor and Debug modules. It also has a NEON co-processor with SIMD media processing architecture, register file with 32 × 64-bit general-purpose registers, an Integer execute pipeline (ALU, Shift, MAC), dual, single-precision floating point execute pipeline (FADD, FMUL), load/store and permute pipeline and a Non-Pipelined Vector Floating Point (VFP) co-processor (VFPv3). Audio Subsystem Audio Subsystem Multimedia Peripherals The elements of the audio subsystem are three Synchronous Serial Interfaces (SSI1-3), a Digital Audio Mux (AUDMUX), and Digital Audio Out (SPDIF TX). See the specific interface listings in this table. Digital Audio Mux Multimedia Peripherals The AUDMUX is a programmable interconnect for voice, audio, and synchronous data routing between host serial interfaces (for example, SSI1, SSI2, and SSI3) and peripheral serial interfaces (audio and voice codecs). The AUDMUX has seven ports (three internal and four external) with identical functionality and programming models. A desired connectivity is achieved by configuring two or more AUDMUX ports. AUDMUX CCM GPC SRC These modules are responsible for clock and reset distribution in the system, Clock Control Clocks, and also for system power management. The modules include three PLLs and Resets, and Module Global Power Power Control a Frequency Pre-Multiplier (FPM). Controller System Reset Controller CSPI-1, eCSPI-2 eCSPI-3 Configurable SPI, Enhanced CSPI Connectivity Peripherals Full-duplex enhanced Synchronous Serial Interface, with data rate up to 66.5Mbit/s (for eCSPI, master mode). It is configurable to support Master/Slave modes, four chip selects to support multiple peripherals. CSU Central Security Unit Security The Central Security Unit (CSU) is responsible for setting comprehensive security policy within the i.MX51A platform, and for sharing security information between the various security modules. The Security Control Registers (SCR) of the CSU are set during boot time by the High Assurance Boot (HAB) code and are locked to prevent further writing. Debug System System Control The Debug System provides real-time trace debug capability of both instructions and data. It supports a trace protocol that is an integral part of the ARM Real Time Debug solution (RealView). Real-time tracing is controlled by specifying a set of triggering and filtering resources, which include address and data comparators, cross-system triggers, counters, and sequencers. Debug System i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 4 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Features Table 2. i.MX51A Digital and Analog Modules (continued) Block Mnemonic EMI EPIT-1 EPIT-2 eSDHC-1 eSDHC-2 eSDHC-3 Block Name Subsystem Brief Description External Memory Interface Connectivity Peripherals The EMI is an external and internal memory interface. It performs arbitration between multi-AXI masters to multi-memory controllers, divided into four major channels: fast memories (Mobile DDR, DDR2) channel, slow memories (NOR-FLASH/PSRAM/NAND-FLASH etc.) channel, internal memory (RAM, ROM) channel and graphical memory (GMEM) Channel. In order to increase the bandwidth performance, the EMI separates the buffering and the arbitration between different channels so parallel accesses can occur. By separating the channels, slow accesses do not interfere with fast accesses. EMI features: • 64-bit and 32-bit AXI ports • Enhanced arbitration scheme for fast channel, including dynamic master priority, and taking into account which pages are open or closed and what type (Read or Write) was the last access • Flexible bank interleaving • Supports 16/32-bit Mobile DDR up to 200 MHz SDCLK (mDDR400) • Supports 16/32-bit (Non-Mobile) DDR2 up to 200 MHz SDCLK (DDR2-400) • Supports up to 2 Gbit Mobile DDR memories • Supports 16-bit (in muxed mode only) PSRAM memories (sync and async operating modes), at slow frequency, for debugging purposes • Supports 32-bit NOR-Flash memories (only in muxed mode), at slow frequencies for debugging purposes • Supports 4/8-ECC, page sizes of 512 Bytes, 2 KBytes and 4 KBytes • NAND-Flash (including MLC) • Multiple chip selects • Enhanced Mobile DDR memory controller, supporting access latency hiding • Supports watermarking for security (Internal and external memories) • Supports Samsung OneNAND™ (only in muxed I/O mode) Enhanced Periodic Interrupt Timer Timer Peripherals Each EPIT is a 32-bit “set and forget” timer that starts counting after the EPIT is enabled by software. It is capable of providing precise interrupts at regular intervals with minimal processor intervention. It has a 12-bit prescaler for division of input clock frequency to get the required time setting for the interrupts to occur, and counter values can be programmed on the fly. Connectivity Enhanced Peripherals Multi-Media Card/ Secure Digital Host Controller The features of the eSDHC module, when serving as host, include the following: • Conforms to SD Host Controller Standard Specification version 2.0 • Compatible with the MMC System Specification version 4.2 • Compatible with the SD Memory Card Specification version 2.0 • Compatible with the SDIO Card Specification version 1.2 • Designed to work with SD Memory, miniSD Memory, SDIO, miniSDIO, SD Combo, MMC and MMC RS cards • Configurable to work in one of the following modes: —SD/SDIO 1-bit, 4-bit —MMC 1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit • Full-/high-speed mode • Host clock frequency variable between 32 kHz to 52 MHz • Up to 200 Mbps data transfer for SD/SDIO cards using four parallel data lines • Up to 416 Mbps data transfer for MMC cards using eight parallel data lines i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 5 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Features Table 2. i.MX51A Digital and Analog Modules (continued) Block Mnemonic Block Name Subsystem Brief Description eSDHC-4 (muxed with P-ATA) Connectivity Enhanced Peripherals Multi-Media Card/ Secure Digital Host Controller Can be configured as eSDHC (see above) and is muxed with the P-ATA interface. FEC Fast Ethernet Connectivity Controller Peripherals The Ethernet Media Access Controller (MAC) is designed to support both 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps ethernet/IEEE Std 802.3™ networks. An external transceiver interface and transceiver function are required to complete the interface to the media. FIRI Fast Infra-Red Interface Connectivity Peripherals Fast Infra-Red Interface General Purpose I/O Modules System Control Peripherals These modules are used for general purpose input/output to external ICs. Each GPIO module supports up to 32 bits of I/O. GPT General Purpose Timer Timer Peripherals Each GPT is a 32-bit “free-running” or “set and forget” mode timer with a programmable prescaler and compare and capture register. A timer counter value can be captured using an external event, and can be configured to trigger a capture event on either the leading or trailing edges of an input pulse. When the timer is configured to operate in “set and forget” mode, it is capable of providing precise interrupts at regular intervals with minimal processor intervention. The counter has output compare logic to provide the status and interrupt at comparison. This timer can be configured to run either on an external clock or on an internal clock. GPU Graphics Processing Unit Multimedia Peripherals The GPU provides hardware acceleration for 2D and 3D graphics algorithms with sufficient processor power to run desk-top quality interactive graphics applications on displays up to HD720 resolution. It supports color representation up to 32 bits per pixel. The GPU with its 128 KByte memory enables high performance mobile 3D and 2D vector graphics at rates up to 27 Mtriangles/sec, 166 M pixels/sec, 664 Mpixels/sec (Z). GPIO-1 GPIO-2 GPIO-3 GPIO-4 GPU2D Multimedia Graphics Peripherals Processing Unit-2D Ver. 1 The GPU2D provides hardware acceleration for 2D graphic algorithms with sufficient processor power to run desk-top quality interactive graphics applications on displays up to HD720 resolution. I2C-1 I2C-2 HS-I2C I2C Interface I2C provides serial interface for controlling peripheral devices. Data rates of up to 400 Kbps are supported by two of the I2C ports. Data rates of up to 3.4 Mbps (I2C Specification v2.1) are supported by the HS-I2C. Note: See the errata for the HS-I2C in the i.MX51 Chip Errata. The two standard I2C modules have no errata. Connectivity Peripherals i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 6 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Features Table 2. i.MX51A Digital and Analog Modules (continued) Block Mnemonic IIM IOMUXC IPU Block Name Subsystem Brief Description IC Identification Module Security The IC Identification Module (IIM) provides an interface for reading, programming, and/or overriding identification and control information stored in on-chip fuse elements. The module supports electrically programmable poly fuses (e-Fuses). The IIM also provides a set of volatile software-accessible signals that can be used for software control of hardware elements not requiring non-volatility. The IIM provides the primary user-visible mechanism for interfacing with on-chip fuse elements. Among the uses for the fuses are unique chip identifiers, mask revision numbers, cryptographic keys, JTAG secure mode, boot characteristics, and various control signals requiring permanent non-volatility. The IIM also provides up to 28 volatile control signals. The IIM consists of a master controller, a software fuse value shadow cache, and a set of registers to hold the values of signals visible outside the module. IOMUX Control System Control Peripherals This module enables flexible I/O multiplexing. Each I/O pad has default as well as several alternate functions. The alternate functions are software configurable. Image Processing Unit Multimedia Peripherals IPU enables connectivity to displays and image sensors, relevant processing and synchronization. It supports two display ports and two camera ports, through the following interfaces. • Legacy Interfaces • Analog TV interfaces (through a TV encoder bridge) The processing includes: • Support for camera control • Image enhancement: color adjustment and gamut mapping, gamma correction and contrast enhancement, sharpening and noise reduction • Video/graphics combining • Support for display backlight reduction • Image conversion—resizing, rotation, inversion and color space conversion • Synchronization and control capabilities, allowing autonomous operation. • Hardware de-interlacing support Keypad Port Connectivity Peripherals The KPP supports an 8 × 8 external keypad matrix. The KPP features are as follows: • Open drain design • Glitch suppression circuit design • Multiple keys detection • Standby key press detection P-ATA (Muxed Parallel ATA with eSDHC-4 Connectivity Peripherals The P-ATA block is an AT attachment host interface. Its main use is to interface with hard disc drives and optical disc drives. It interfaces with the ATA-5 (UDMA-4) compliant device over a number of ATA signals. It is possible to connect a bus buffer between the host side and the device side. This is muxed with eSDHC-4 interfaces. KPP PWM-1 PWM-2 Pulse Width Modulation Connectivity Peripherals The pulse-width modulator (PWM) has a 16-bit counter and is optimized to generate sound from stored sample audio images. It can also generate tones. The PWM uses 16-bit resolution and a 4x16 data FIFO to generate sound. RAM 128 Kbytes Internal RAM Internal Memory Unified RAM, can be split between Secure RAM and Non-Secure RAM ROM 36 Kbytes Boot ROM Internal Memory Supports secure and regular Boot Modes i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 7 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Features Table 2. i.MX51A Digital and Analog Modules (continued) Block Mnemonic RTIC Block Name SDMA SIM Brief Description Security Protecting read-only data from modification is one of the basic elements in trusted platforms. The Run-Time Integrity Checker v3 (RTICv3) module, is a data monitoring device responsible for ensuring that memory content is not corrupted during program execution. The RTICv3 mechanism periodically checks the integrity of code or data sections during normal OS run-time execution without interfering with normal operation. The RTICv3’s purpose is to ensure the integrity of the peripheral memory contents, protect against unauthorized external memory elements replacement, and assist with boot authentication. Security SAHARA (Symmetric/Asymmetric Hashing and Random Accelerator) is a security co-processor. It implements symmetric encryption algorithms, (AES, DES, 3DES, and RC4), public key algorithms, hashing algorithms (MD5, SHA-1, SHA-224, and SHA-256), and a hardware random number generator. It has a slave IP bus interface for the host to write configuration and command information, and to read status information. It also has a DMA controller, with an AHB bus interface, to reduce the burden on the host to move the required data to and from memory. Security Controller Security The Security Controller is a security assurance hardware module designed to safely hold sensitive data such as encryption keys, digital right management (DRM) keys, passwords, and biometrics reference data. The SCC monitors the system’s alert signal to determine if the data paths to and from it are secure—that is, cannot be accessed from outside of the defined security perimeter. If not, it erases all sensitive data on its internal RAM. The SCC also features a Key Encryption Module (KEM) that allows non-volatile (external memory) storage of any sensitive data that is temporarily not in use. The KEM utilizes a device-specific hidden secret key and a symmetric cryptographic algorithm to transform the sensitive data into encrypted data. Smart Direct Memory Access System Control Peripherals The SDMA is multi-channel flexible DMA engine. It helps in maximizing system performance by off loading various cores in dynamic data routing. The SDMA features list is as follows: • Powered by a 16-bit instruction-set micro-RISC engine • Multi-channel DMA supports up to 32 time-division multiplexed DMA channels • 48 events with total flexibility to trigger any combination of channels • Memory accesses including linear, FIFO, and 2D addressing • Shared peripherals between ARM Cortex A8™ and SDMA • Very fast context-switching with two-level priority-based preemptive multi-tasking • DMA units with auto-flush and prefetch capability • Flexible address management for DMA transfers (increment, decrement, and no address changes on source and destination address) • DMA ports can handle unit-directional and bi-directional flows (copy mode) • Up to 8-word buffer for configurable burst transfers for EMI • Support of byte-swapping and CRC calculations • A library of scripts and API are available Subscriber Identity Module Interface Connectivity Peripherals The SIM is an asynchronous interface with additional features for allowing communication with Smart Cards conforming to the ISO 7816 specification. The SIM is designed to facilitate communication to SIM cards or pre-paid phone cards. Real Time Integrity Checker SAHARA Lite SAHARA security accelerator Lite SCC Subsystem i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 8 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Features Table 2. i.MX51A Digital and Analog Modules (continued) Block Mnemonic SJC Block Name Secure JTAG Interface Subsystem System Control Peripherals Brief Description JTAG manipulation is a known hacker’s method of executing unauthorized program code, getting control over secure applications, and running code in privileged modes. The JTAG port provides a debug access to several hardware blocks including the ARM processor and the system bus. The JTAG port must be accessible during platform initial laboratory bring-up, manufacturing tests and troubleshooting, as well as for software debugging by authorized entities. However, in order to properly secure the system, unauthorized JTAG usage should be strictly forbidden. In order to prevent JTAG manipulation while allowing access for manufacturing tests and software debugging, the i.MX51A processor incorporates a mechanism for regulating JTAG access. The i.MX51A Secure JTAG Controller provides four different JTAG security modes that can be selected via e-fuse configuration. SPBA Shared Peripheral Bus Arbiter System Control Peripherals SPBA (Shared Peripheral Bus Arbiter) is a two-to-one IP bus interface (IP bus) arbiter. SPDIF Sony Philips Digital Interface Multimedia Peripherals A standard digital audio transmission protocol developed jointly by the Sony and Philips corporations. Only the transmitter functionality is supported. SRTC Secure Real Time Clock Security The SRTC incorporates a special System State Retention Register (SSRR) that stores system parameters during system shutdown modes. This register and all SRTC counters are powered by dedicated supply rail NVCC_SRTC_POW. The NVCC_SRTC_POW can be energized even if all other supply rails are shut down. The power for this block comes from NVCC_SRTC_POW supply. When this supply is driven by the MC13892 power management controller, this block can be power backed up via the coin-cell feature of the MC13892.This register is helpful for storing warm boot parameters. The SSRR also stores the system security state. In case of a security violation, the SSRR mark the event (security violation indication). SSI-1 I2S/SSI/AC97 Connectivity Interface Peripherals The SSI is a full-duplex synchronous interface used on the i.MX51A processor to provide connectivity with off-chip audio peripherals. The SSI interfaces connect internally to the AUDMUX which interfaces to the i.MX51 system memory. The SSI supports a wide variety of protocols (SSI normal, SSI network, I2S, and AC-97), bit depths (up to 24 bits per word), and clock/frame sync options. Each SSI has two pairs of 8x24 FIFOs and hardware support for an external DMA controller in order to minimize its impact on system performance. The second pair of FIFOs provides hardware interleaving of a second audio stream, which reduces CPU overhead in use cases where two timeslots are being used simultaneously. TV Encoder The TVE is implemented in conjunction with the Image Processing Unit (IPU) allowing handheld devices to display captured still images and video directly on a TV or LCD projector. It supports the following analog video outputs: composite, S-video, and component video up to HD720p/1080i. SSI-2 SSI-3 TVE Multimedia i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 9 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Features Table 2. i.MX51A Digital and Analog Modules (continued) Block Mnemonic Block Name Subsystem Brief Description TZIC TrustZone Aware Interrupt Controller ARM/Control The TrustZone Interrupt Controller (TZIC) collects interrupt requests from all i.MX51A sources and routes them to the ARM core. Each interrupt can be configured as a normal or a secure interrupt. Software Force Registers and software Priority Masking are also supported. UART-1 UART-2 UART-3 UART Interface Connectivity Peripherals Each of the UART modules supports the following serial data transmit/receive protocols and configurations: • 7 or 8 bit data words, 1 or 2 stop bits, programmable parity (even, odd, or none) • Programmable baud rates up to 4 MHz. This is a higher max baud rate relative to the 1.875 MHz, which is stated by the TIA/EIA-232-F standard and previous Freescale UART modules. • 32-byte FIFO on Tx and 32 half-word FIFO on Rx supporting auto-baud • IrDA 1.0 support (up to SIR speed of 115200 bps) • Option to operate as 8-pins full UART, DCE, or DTE USB USB 2.0 High-Speed OTG and 3x Hosts Connectivity Peripherals USB-OTG contains one high-speed OTG module, which is internally connected to the on-chip HS USB PHY. There are an additional three high-speed host modules that require external USB PHYs. VPU Video Processing Unit Multimedia Peripherals A high-performing video processing unit (VPU), which covers many SD-level video decoders and SD-level encoders as a multi-standard video codec engine as well as several important video processing such as rotation and mirroring. VPU Features: • MPEG-4 decode: 720p, 30 fps, simple profile and advanced simple profile • MPEG-4 encode: D1, 25/30 fps, simple profile • H.263 decode: 720p, 30 fps, profile 3 • H.263 encode: D1, 25/30 fps, profile 3 • H.264 decode: 720p, 30 fps, baseline, main, and high profile • H.264 encode: D1, 25/30 fps, baseline profile • MPEG-2 decode: 720p, 30 fps, MP-ML • MPEG-2 encode: D1, 25/30 fps, MP-ML (in software with partial acceleration in hardware) • VC-1 decode: 720p, 30 fps, simple, main, and advanced profile • DivX decode: 720p, 30 fps versions 3, 4, and 5 • RV10 decode: 720p, 30 fps • MJPEG decode: 32 Mpix/s • MJPEG encode: 64 Mpix/s WDOG-1 Watch Dog Timer Peripherals The Watch Dog Timer supports two comparison points during each counting period. Each of the comparison points is configurable to evoke an interrupt to the ARM core, and a second point evokes an external event on the WDOG line. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 10 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Features Table 2. i.MX51A Digital and Analog Modules (continued) Block Mnemonic Block Name Subsystem Brief Description WDOG-2 (TZ) Watch Dog (TrustZone) Timer Peripherals The TrustZone Watchdog (TZ WDOG) timer module protects against TrustZone starvation by providing a method of escaping normal mode and forcing a switch to the TZ mode. TZ starvation is a situation where the normal OS prevents switching to the TZ mode. This situation should be avoided, as it can compromise the system’s security. Once the TZ WDOG module is activated, it must be serviced by TZ software on a periodic basis. If servicing does not take place, the timer times out. Upon a time-out, the TZ WDOG asserts a TZ mapped interrupt that forces switching to the TZ mode. If it is still not served, the TZ WDOG asserts a security violation signal to the CSU. The TZ WDOG module cannot be programmed or deactivated by a normal mode SW. XTALOSC Crystal Oscillator I/F Clocking The XTALOSC module allows connectivity to an external crystal. 2.1 Special Signal Considerations Table 3 lists special signal considerations for the i.MX51. The signal names are listed in alphabetical order. The package contact assignments are found in Section 5, “Package Information and Contact Assignments.” Signal descriptions are defined in the i.MX51 reference manual. Table 3. Special Signal Considerations Signal Name Remarks CKIH1, CKIH2 Inputs feeding CAMPs (Clock Amplifiers) that have on-chip ac coupling precluding the need for external coupling capacitors. The CAMPs are enabled by default, but the main clocks feeding the on-chip clock tree are sourced from XTAL/EXTAL by default. Optionally, the use of a low jitter external oscillators to feed CKIH1 or CKIH2 (while not required) can be an advantage if low jitter or special frequency clock sources are required by modules driven by CKIH1 or CKIH2. See CCM chapter in the i.MX51 reference manual for details on the respective clock trees. After initialization, the CAMPs could be disabled (if not used) by CCM registers (CCR CAMPx_EN field). If disabled, the on-chip CAMP output is low; the input is irrelevant. If unused, the user should tie CKIH1/CKIH2 to GND for best practice. CLK_SS Clock Source Select is the input that selects the default reference clock source providing input to the DPLLs. To use a reference in the megahertz range per Table 8, tie CLK_SS to GND to select EXTAL/XTAL. To use a reference in the kilohertz range per Table 59, tie CLK_SS to NVCC_PER3 to select CKIL. After initialization, the reference clock source can be changed (initial setting is overwritten). Note: Because this input has a keeper circuit, Freescale recommends tying this input to directly to GND or NVCC_PER3. If a series resistor is used its value must be ≤ 4.7 kΩ. COMP The user should bypass this reference with an external 0.1 µ F capacitor tied to GND. If TV OUT is not used, float the COMP contact and ensure the DACs are powered down. Note: Previous engineering samples required this reference to be bypassed to a positive supply. FASTR_ANA and FASTR_DIG These signals are reserved for Freescale manufacturing use only. User must tie both connections to GND. GPANAIO This signal is reserved for Freescale manufacturing use only. Users should float this output. GPIO_NAND This is a general-purpose input/output (GPIO3_12) on the NVCC_NANDF_A power rail. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 11 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Features Table 3. Special Signal Considerations (continued) Signal Name Remarks IOB, IOG, IOR, IOB_BACK, These signals are analog TV outputs that should be tied to GND when not being used. IOG_BACK, and IOR_BACK JTAG_nnnn The JTAG interface is summarized in Table 4. Use of external resistors is unnecessary. However, if external resistors are used, the user must ensure that the on-chip pull-up/down configuration is followed. For example, do not use an external pull down on an input that has on-chip pull-up. JTAG_TDO is configured with a keeper circuit such that the floating condition is eliminated if an external pull resistor is not present. An external pull resistor on JTAG_TDO is detrimental and should be avoided. JTAG_MOD is referenced as SJC_MOD in the i.MX51 Reference Manual. Both names refer to the same signal. JTAG_MOD must be externally connected to GND for normal operation. Termination to GND through an external pull-down resistor (such as 1 kΩ) is allowed. NC These signals are No Connect (NC) and should be floated by the user. PMIC_INT_REQ When using the MC13892 power management IC, the PMIC_INT_REQ high-priority interrupt input on i.MX51 should be either floated or tied to NVCC_SRTC_POW with a 4.7 kΩ to 68 kΩ resistor. This avoids a continuous current drain on the real-time clock backup battery due to a 100 kΩ on-chip pull-up resistor. PMIC_INT_REQ is not used by the Freescale BSP (board support package) software. The BSP requires that the general-purpose INT output from the MC13892 be connected to i.MX51 GPIO input GPIO1_8 configured to cause an interrupt that is not high-priority. The original intent was for PMIC_INT_REQ to be connected to a circuit that detects when the battery is almost depleted. In this case, the I/O must be configured as alternate mode 0 (ALT0 = power fail). POR_B This cold reset negative logic input resets all modules and logic in the IC. Note: The POR_B input must be immediately asserted at power-up and remain asserted until after the last power rail is at its working voltage. RESET_IN_B This warm reset negative logic input resets all modules and logic except for the following: • Test logic (JTAG, IOMUXC, DAP) • SRTC • Memory repair – Configuration of memory repair per fuse settings • Cold reset logic of WDOG – Some WDOG logic is only reset by POR_B. See WDOG chapter in i.MX51 Reference Manual for details. RREFEXT Determines the reference current for the USB PHY bandgap reference. An external 6.04 kΩ 1% resistor to GND is required. SGND, SVCC, and SVDDGP These sense lines provide the ability to sense actual on-chip voltage levels on their respective supplies. SGND monitors differentials of the on-chip ground versus an external power source. SVCC monitors on-chip VCC, and SVDDGP monitors VDDGP. Freescale recommends connection of the SVCC and SVDDGP signals to the feedback inputs of switching power-supplies or to test points. STR This signal is reserved for Freescale manufacturing use. The user should float this signal. TEST_MODE TEST_MODE is for Freescale factory use only. This signal is internally connected to an on-chip pull-down device. Users must either float this signal or tie it to GND. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 12 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice IOMUX Configuration for Boot Media Table 3. Special Signal Considerations (continued) Signal Name Remarks VREF When using VREF with DDR-2 I/O, the nominal 0.9 V reference voltage must be half of the NVCC_EMI_DRAM supply. The user must tie VREF to a precision external resistor divider. Use a 1 kΩ 0.5% resistor to GND and a 1 kΩ 0.5% resistor to NVCC_EMI_DRAM. Shunt each resistor with a closely-mounted 0.1 µF capacitor. To reduce supply current, a pair of 1.5 kΩ 0.1% resistors can be used. Using resistors with recommended tolerances ensures the ± 2% VREF tolerance (per the DDR-2 specification) is maintained when four DDR-2 ICs plus the i.MX51 are drawing current on the resistor divider. Note: When VREF is used with mDDR this signal must be tied to GND. VREFOUT This signal determines the Triple Video DAC (TVDAC) reference voltage. The user must tie VREFOUT to an external 1.05 kΩ 1% resistor to GND. VREG This regulator is no longer used and should be floated by the user. XTAL/EXTAL The user should tie a fundamental-mode crystal across XTAL and EXTAL. The crystal must be rated for a maximum drive level of 100 μW or higher. An ESR (equivalent series resistance) of 80 Ω or less is recommended. Freescale BSP (Board Support Package) software requires 24 MHz on EXTAL. The crystal can be eliminated if an external 24 MHz oscillator is available. In this case, EXTAL must be directly driven by the external oscillator and XTAL is floated. The EXTAL signal level must swing from NVCC_OSC to GND. If the clock is used for USB, then there are strict jitter requirements: < 50 ps peak-to-peak below 1.2 MHz and < 100 ps peak-to-peak above 1.2 MHz for the USB PHY. The COSC_EN bit in the CCM (Clock Control Module) must be cleared to put the on-chip oscillator circuit in bypass mode which allows EXTAL to be externally driven. COSC_EN is bit 12 in the CCR register of the CCM. Table 4. JTAG Controller Interface Summary JTAG I/O Type On-chip Termination JTAG_TCK Input 100 kΩ pull-down JTAG_TMS Input 47 kΩ pull-up JTAG_TDI Input 47 kΩ pull-up JTAG_TDO 3-state output Keeper Input 47 kΩ pull-up JTAG_DE_B Input/open-drain output 47 kΩ pull-up JTAG_MOD Input 100 kΩ pull-down JTAG_TRSTB 3 IOMUX Configuration for Boot Media The information provided in this section describes the contacts assigned for each type of bootable media. It also includes data about the clocks used during boot flow and their frequencies. Signals that can be multiplexed appear in tables throughout this section. See the IOMUXC chapter in the MX51 Reference Manual for details about how to program the IOMUX controller. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 13 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice IOMUX Configuration for Boot Media 3.1 NAND The NAND Flash Controller (NFC) signals are not configured in the IOMUX. The NFC interface uses dedicated contacts on the IC. 3.2 SD/MMC IOMUX Pin Configuration Table 5 shows the SD/MMC IOMUX pin configuration. Table 5. SD/MMC IOMUX Pin Configuration 1 Signal eSDHC1 eSDHC2 eSDHC3 eSDHC4 CLK SD1_CLK.alt0 SD2_CLK.alt0 NANDF_RDY_INT.alt5 NANDF_CS2.alt5 CMD SD1_CMD.alt0 SD2_CMD.alt0 NANDF_CS7.alt5 NANDF_RB1.alt5 DAT0 SD1_DATA0.alt0 SD2_DATA0.alt0 NANDF_WE_B.alt2 NANDF_CS3.alt5 DAT1 N/A1 N/A N/A N/A DAT2 N/A N/A N/A N/A CD/DAT3 SD1_DATA3.alt0 SD2_DATA3.alt0 NANDF_RB0.alt5 NANDF_CS6.alt5 DAT4 N/A N/A N/A N/A DAT5 N/A N/A N/A N/A DAT6 N/A N/A N/A N/A DAT7 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A in the ROM code indicates the pins are not available. Only DAT0 is available when the SD/MMC is used for boot. The remaining lines (DAT1–DAT7) are not available. 3.3 I2C IOMUX Pin Configuration The contacts assigned to the signals used by the three I2C modules is shown in Table 6. Table 6. I2C IOMUX Pin Configuration Signal HSI2C I2C1 I2C2 SDA I2C1_DAT.alt0 I2C1_DAT.alt0 GPIO1_3.alt2 SCL I2C1_CLK.alt0 I2C1_CLK.alt0 GPIO1_2.alt2 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 14 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice IOMUX Configuration for Boot Media 3.4 eCSPI/CSPI IOMUX Pin Configuration The contacts assigned to the signals used by the three SPI modules is shown in Table 7. Table 7. SPI IOMUX Pin Configuration 1 3.5 Signal eCSPI1 eCSPI2 CSPI MISO CSPI1_MISO.alt0 NANDF_RB3.alt2 USBH1_NXT.alt1 MOSI CSPI1_MOSI.alt0 NANDF_D15.alt2 USBH1_DIR.alt1 RDY CSPI1_RDY.alt0 NANDF_RB1.alt2 USBH1_STP.alt1 SCLK CSPI1_SCLK.alt0 NANDF_RB2.alt2 USBH1_CLK.alt1 SS0 N/A1 N/A N/A SS1 N/A N/A USBH1_DATA5.alt1 SS2 N/A N/A N/A SS3 N/A N/A N/A N/A in the ROM code indicates the pins are not available. Wireless External Interface Module (WEIM) The WEIM interface signals are not configured in the IOMUX. The WEIM interface uses dedicated contacts on the IC. 3.6 UART IOMUX Pin Configuration The contacts assigned to the signals used by the three UART modules are shown in Table 8. Table 8. UART IOMUX Pin Configuration 3.7 Signal UART1 UART2 UART3 TXD UART1_TXD.alt0 UART2_TXD.alt0 UART3_TXD.alt1 RXD UART1_RXD.alt0 UART2_RXD.alt0 UART3_RXD.alt1 CTS UART1_CTS.alt0 USBH1_DATA0.alt1 KEY_COL5.alt2 RTS UART1_RTS.alt0 USBH1_DATA3.alt1 KEY_COL4.alt2 USB-OTG IOMUX Pin Configuration The interface signals of the UTMI PHY are not configured in the IOMUX. The UTMI PHY interface uses dedicated contacts on the IC. The contacts assigned to the signals used by the three UART modules are shown in Table 9. Table 9. ULPI PHY IOMUX Pin Configuration Signal ULPI PHY USB_PWR GPIO1_8.alt1 USB_OC GPIO1_9.alt1 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 15 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 9. ULPI PHY IOMUX Pin Configuration (continued) 4 Signal ULPI PHY USBOTG_CLK EIM_CS4.alt2 USBOTG_NXT EIM_CS3.alt2 USBOTG_STP EIM_CS2.alt2 USBOTG_DAT0 EIM_D24.alt2 USBOTG_DAT1 EIM_D25.alt2 USBOTG_DAT2 EIM_D26.alt2 USBOTG_DAT3 EIM_D27.alt2 USBOTG_DAT4 EIM_D28.alt2 USBOTG_DAT5 EIM_D29.alt2 USBOTG_DAT6 EIM_D30.alt2 USBOTG_DAT7 EIM_D31.alt2 Electrical Characteristics This section provides the device and module-level electrical characteristics for the i.MX51Aprocessor. 4.1 Chip-Level Conditions This section provides the device-level electrical characteristics for the IC. See Table 10 for a quick reference to the individual tables and sections. Table 10. i.MX51A Chip-Level Conditions For these characteristics, … Topic appears … Table 11, “Absolute Maximum Ratings” on page 17 Table 12, “Thermal Resistance Data” on page 17 Table 13, “i.MX51A Operating Ranges” on page 17 Table 14, “Interface Frequency” on page 19 CAUTION Stresses beyond those listed under Table 11 may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only. Functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under Table 13, "i.MX51A Operating Ranges," on page 17 is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 16 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 11. Absolute Maximum Ratings Parameter Description Symbol Min Max Unit VCC –0.3 1.35 V VDDGP –0.3 1.15 V Supplies denoted as I/O Supply –0.5 3.6 V Supplies denoted as I/O Supply –0.5 3.3 V USB VBUS VBUS — 5.25 V Input/Output Voltage Range Vin /Vout –0.5 OVDD +0.31 V Peripheral Core Supply Voltage ARM Core Supply Voltage Supply Voltage (UHVIO, I2 C) Supply Voltage (except UHVIO, I2C) ESD Damage Immunity: Vesd V Human Body Model (HBM) Charge Device Model (CDM) Storage Temperature Range — — 2000 500 TSTORAGE –40 125 oC TJ — 125 2 oC Junction Temperature 1 The term OVDD in this section refers to the associated supply rail of an input or output. The association is described in Table 127 on page 152. The maximum range can be superseded by the DC tables. 2 During the life of the device, T must be limited to a cumulative of 2% of the time over 105 oC. J Table 12 provides the thermal resistance data. Table 12. Thermal Resistance Data Rating Board Symbol Value Unit — RθJC 6 °C/W Junction to Case1, 19 x 19 mm package 1 Rjc-x per JEDEC 51-12: The junction-to-case thermal resistance. The “x” indicates the case surface where Tcase is measured and through which 100% of the junction power is forced to flow due to the cold plate heat sink fixture placed either at the top (T) or bottom (B) of the package, with no board attached to the package. Table 13 shows the i.MX51A operating ranges. Table 13. i.MX51A Operating Ranges Symbol VDDGP MCIMX51xA products VCC MCIMX51xA products Minimum1 Nominal2 Maximum1 Unit ARM core supply voltage 0 < fARM ≤ 600 MHz 0.95 1.0 1.1 V ARM core supply voltage Stop mode 0.92 0.95 1.05 V 1.175 1.225 1.275 V 0.92 0.95 1.275 V Parameter Peripheral supply voltage High Performance Mode (HPM) The clock frequencies are derived from AXI and AHB buses using 133 or 166 MHz (as needed). The DDR clock rate is 200 MHz. Note: For detailed information about the use of 133 or 166 MHz clocks, refer to the i.MX51 Reference Manual. Peripheral supply voltage—Stop mode i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 17 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 13. i.MX51A Operating Ranges (continued) Minimum1 Nominal2 Maximum1 Unit Memory arrays voltage—Run Mode 1.15 1.20 1.275 V Memory arrays voltage—Stop Mode 0.92 0.95 1.275 V VDD_DIG_PLL_A VDD_DIG_PLL_B PLL Digital supplies 1.15 1.2 1.35 V VDD_ANA_PLL_A VDD_ANA_PLL_B PLL Analog supplies 1.75 1.8 1.95 V NVCC_EMI NVCC_PER5 NVCC_PER10 NVCC_PER11 NVCC_PER12 NVCC_PER13 NVCC_PER14 GPIO EMI Supply and additional digital power supplies. 1.65 1.875 or 2.775 3.1 V NVCC_IPUx3 NVCC_PER3 NVCC_PER8 NVCC_PER9 GPIO IPU Supply and additional digital power supplies. 1.65 1.875 or 2.775 3.1 V DDR and Fuse Read Supply 1.65 1.8 1.95 V Fusebox Program Supply (Write Only) 3.0 — 3.3 V Symbol VDDA NVCC_EMI_DRAM VDD_FUSE 4 NVCC_NANDF_x 5 NVCC_PER15 NVCC_PER17 NVCC_USBPHY NVCC_OSC TVDAC_DHVDD, NVCC_TV_BACK, AHVDDRGB NVCC_HS4_1 NVCC_HS4_2 NVCC_HS6 NVCC_HS10 NVCC_I2C NVCC_SRTC_ POW VDDA33 VBUS Parameter Ultra High voltage I/O (UHVIO) supplies — V UHVIO_L 1.65 1.875 1.95 UHVIO_H 2.5 2.775 3.1 UHVIO_UH 3.0 3.3 3.6 USB_PHY analog supply, oscillator analog supply6 2.25 2.5 2.75 V TVE-to-DAC level shifter supply, cable detector supply, analog power supply to RGB channel 2.69 2.75 2.91 V HS-GPIO additional digital power supplies 1.65 — 3.1 V I2C and HS-I2C I/O Supply7 1.65 1.875 1.95 V 2.7 3.0 3.3 SRTC Core and I/O Supply (LVIO) 1.1 1.2 1.3 V USB PHY I/O analog supply 3.0 3.3 3.6 V See Table 11 on page 17 and Table 125 on page 147 for details. This is not a power supply. — — — — i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 18 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 1 Voltage at the package power supply contact must be maintained between the minimum and maximum voltages. The design must allow for supply tolerances and system voltage drops. The nominal values for the supplies indicate the target setpoint for a tolerance no tighter than ± 50 mV. Use of supplies with a tighter tolerance allows reduction of the setpoint with commensurate power savings. The NVCC_IPUx rails are isolated from one another. This allows the connection of different supply voltages for each one. For example, NVCC_IPU2 can operate at 1.8 V while NVCC_IPU4 operates at 3.0 V. In Read mode, Freescale recommends VDD_FUSE be floated or grounded. Tying VDD_FUSE to a positive supply (3.0 V–3.3 V) increases the possibility of inadvertently blowing fuses and is not recommended. The NAND Flash supplies are composed of three groups: A, B, and C. Each group can be powered with a different supply voltage. For example, NVCC_NANDF_A = 1.8 V, NVCC_NANDF_B = 3.0 V, NVCC_NANDF_C = 2.7 V. The analog supplies should be isolated in the application design. Use of series inductors is recommended. Operation of the HS-I2C and I2C is not guaranteed when operated between the supply voltages of 1.95 to 2.7 V. 2 3 4 5 6 7 Table 14. Interface Frequency Parameter Description Symbol Min Max Unit JTAG: TCK Operating Frequency ftck See Table 98, "JTAG Timing," on page 127 MHz CKIL: Operating Frequency fckil See Table 73, "FPM Specifications," on page 77 kHz CKIH: Operating Frequency fckih See Table 46, "CAMP Electrical Parameters (CKIH1, CKIH2)," on page 45 MHz XTAL Oscillator fxtal 4.1.1 22 27 MHz Supply Current Table 15 shows the fuse supply current. Table 15. Fuse Supply Current Description eFuse Program Current.1 Current to required to program one eFuse bit: The associated VDD_FUSE supply per Table 13. eFuse Read Current2 Current necessary to read an 8-bit eFuse word 1 2 Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Iprogram — 60 TBD mA Iread — TBD TBD mA The current Iprogram is only required during program time (tprogram). The current Iread is present for approximately TBD ns of the read access to the 8-bit word. The current is derived from the DDR supply (NVCC_EMI_DRAM). i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 19 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 16 shows the current core consumption (not including I/O) of the i.MX51. Table 16. i.MX51 Stop Mode Current and Power Consumption Mode Condition Stop Mode • External reference clocks gated • Power gating for ARM and processing units • Stop mode voltage Stop Mode • External reference clocks gated • Power gating for ARM and processing units • HPM voltage Stop Mode • External reference clocks enabled • Power gating for ARM and processing units • HPM voltage VDDGP = 0.95 V, VCC = 0.95 V, VDDA = 0.95 V ARM CORE in SRPG mode L1 and L2 caches power gated IPU in S&RPG mode VPU and GPU in PG mode All PLLs off, all CCM-generated clocks off CKIL input on with 32 kHz signal present All modules disabled USBPHY PLL off External (MHz) crystal and on-chip oscillator powered down (SBYOS bit asserted) No external resistive loads that cause current flow Standby voltage allowed (VSTBY bit is asserted) TA = 25°C VDDGP = 1.0 V, VCC = 1.225 V, VDDA = 1.2 V ARM CORE in SRPG mode L1 and L2 caches power gated IPU in S&RPG mode VPU and GPU in PG mode All PLLs off, all CCM-generated clocks off CKIL input on with 32 kHz signal present All modules disabled. USBPHY PLL off External (MHz) crystal and on-chip oscillator powered down (SBYOS bit asserted) No external resistive loads that cause current flow TA = 25°C VDDGP = 1.0 V, VCC = 1.225 V, VDDA = 1.20 V ARM CORE in SRPG mode L1 and L2 caches power gated IPU in S&RPG mode VPU and GPU in PG mode All PLLs off, all CCM-generated clocks off Supply Nominal Unit VDDGP 0.18 mA VCC 0.35 VDDA 0.15 NVCC_OSC 0.012 Total 0.66 mW VDDGP 0.24 mA VCC 0.45 VDDA 0.2 NVCC_OSC 0.012 Total 1.09 mW VDDGP 0.24 mA VCC 0.45 VDDA 0.2 NVCC_OSC 1.5 Total 4.8 mW CKIL input on with 32 kHz signal present All modules disabled USBPHY PLL off External (MHz) crystal and on-chip oscillator powered and generating reference clock No external resistive loads that cause current flow TA = 25°C i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 20 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 16. i.MX51 Stop Mode Current and Power Consumption (continued) Mode Condition Stop Mode • External reference clocks enabled • No power gating for ARM and processing units • HPM voltage 4.1.2 VDDGP = 1.0 V, VCC = 1.225 V, VDDA = 1.2 V All PLLs off, all CCM-generated clocks off CKIL input on with 32 kHz signal present All modules disabled USBPHY PLL off External (MHz) crystal and on-chip oscillator powered and generating reference clock No external resistive loads that cause current flow TA = 25°C Supply Nominal Unit VDDGP 50 mA VCC 2 VDDA 1.15 NVCC_OSC 1.5 Total 63 mW USB PHY Current Consumption Table 17 shows the USB PHY current consumption. Table 17. USB PHY Current Consumption Parameter Conditions Full Speed Analog Supply VDDA33 (3.3 V) High Speed Full Speed Analog Supply NVCC_USBPHY (2.5 V) High Speed Full Speed Digital Supply VCC (1.2 V) High Speed VDDA33 + NVCC_USBPHY +VCC 4.2 Typical @ 25 °C Max RX 5.5 6 TX 7 8 RX 5 6 TX 5 6 RX 6.5 7 TX 6.5 7 RX 12 13 TX 21 22 RX 6 7 TX 6 7 RX 6 7 TX 6 7 50 100 Suspend Unit mA mA mA μA Supply Power-Up/Power-Down Requirements and Restrictions The system design must comply with the power-up and power-down sequence guidelines as described in this section to guarantee reliable operation of the device. Any deviation from these sequences may result in the following situations: • Excessive current during power-up phase • Prevention of the device from booting • Irreversible damage to the i.MX51A processor (worst-case scenario) i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 21 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.2.1 Power-Up Sequence Figure 2 shows the power-up sequence. NVCC_SRTC_POW VCC NVCC_EMI_DRAM VDDGP 4 VDDA NVCC_HS4_1 NVCC_HS4_2 NVCC_HS6 NVCC_HS10 NVCC_PERx2 NVCC_EMI NVCC_IPU NVCC_I2C NVCC_NANDF_x NVCC_PER15 NVCC_PER17 AHVDDRGB NVCC_TV_BACK TVDAC_DHVDD VDD_DIG_PLL_A/B VDD_ANA_PLL_A/B NVCC_OSC NVCC_USBPHY VDDA33 VDD_FUSE1 1. VDD_FUSE should only be powered when writing. 2. NVCC_PERx refers to NVCC_PER 3, 5, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14. 3. No power-up sequence dependencies exist between the supplies shown in the block diagram shaded in gray. 4. There is no requirement for VDDGP to be preceded by any other power supply other than NVCC_SRTC_POW. 5. If all of the UHVIO supplies (NVCC_NANDFx, NVCC_PER15 and NVCC_PER17) are less than 2.75 V then there is no requirement on the power up sequence order between NVCC_EMI_DRAM and the UHVIO supplies. However, if the voltage is 2.75 V and above, then NVCC_EMI_DRAM needs to power up before the UHVIO supplies as shown here. Figure 2. Power-Up Sequence NOTE The POR_B input must be immediately asserted at power-up and remain asserted until after the last power rail is at its working voltage. For more information on power up, see i.MX51 Power-Up Sequence (AN4053) 4.3 I/O DC Parameters This section includes the DC parameters of the following I/O types: • General Purpose I/O and High-Speed General Purpose I/O (GPIO/HSGPIO) • Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) • Low Voltage I/O (LVIO) • Ultra High Voltage I/O (UHVIO) • High-Speed I2C and I2C • Enhanced Secure Digital Host Controller (eSDHC) i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 22 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics NOTE The term OVDD in this section refers to the associated supply rail of an input or output. The association is shown in Table 127. 4.3.1 GPIO/HSGPIO DC Parameters The parameters in Table 18 are guaranteed per the operating ranges in Table 13, unless otherwise noted. Table 18. GPIO/HSGPIO DC Electrical Characteristics Parameter Symbol Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit High-level output voltage Voh Iout = -1 mA OVDD –0.15 — OVDD + 0.3 V Low-level output voltage Vol Iout = 1mA — — 0.15 V High-level output current Ioh — — Low-level output current Iol Vout = 0.8×OVDD Low drive Medium drive High drive Max drive –1.9 –3.7 –5.2 –6.6 Vout = 0.2×OVDD Low drive Medium drive High drive Max drive 1.9 3.7 5.2 6.6 mA — — mA High-Level DC input voltage1 VIH — 0.7 × OVDD — OVDD V Low-Level DC input voltage1 VIL — 0 — 0.3×OVDD V VHYS OVDD = 1.875 OVDD = 2.775 0.25 0.34 0.45 — V Schmitt trigger VT+1, 2 VT+ — 0.5OVDD — — V Schmitt trigger VT-1, 2 VT- — — — 0.5 × OVDD V Input current (no pull-up/down) IIN VI = OVDD or 0 — — TBD — Input current (22 kΩ Pull-up) IIN VI = 0 VI = OVDD — — 161 TBD μA Input current (47 kΩ Pull-up) IIN VI = 0 VI = OVDD — — 76 TBD μA Input current (100 kΩ Pull-up) IIN VI = 0 V I= OVDD — — 36 TBD μA Input current (100 kΩ Pull-down) IIN VI = 0 VI = OVDD — — TBD 36 μA Icc-ovdd VI = OVDD or 0 — — TBD μA OVDD = 1.875V OVDD = 2.775V — — 22 17 — — kΩ Input Hysteresis High-impedance I/O supply current Keeper Circuit Resistance 1 To maintain a valid level, the transition edge of the input must sustain a constant slew rate (monotonic) from the current DC level through to the target DC level, VIL or VIH. Monotonic input transition time is from 0.1ns to 1s. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 23 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 2 Hysteresis of 250 mV is guaranteed over all operating conditions when hysteresis is enabled. 4.3.2 DDR2 I/O DC Parameters The parameters in Table 19 are guaranteed per the operating ranges in Table 13, unless otherwise noted. Table 19. DDR2 I/O DC Electrical Parameters Parameters Symbol Test Conditions Min Max OVDD – 0.28 High-level output voltage Voh — Low-level output voltage Vol — Output minimum Source Current Ioh OVDD=1.7V Vout=1.42V –13.4 — mA Output min Sink Current Iol OVDD=1.7V Vout=0.28V 13.4 — mA DC input Logic High VIH — OVDD/2+0.125 OVDD+0.3 DC input Logic Low VIL — –0.3 OVDD/2–0.125 V Input voltage range of each differential input Vin — –0.3 OVDD+0.3 V Differential input voltage required for switching Vid — 0.25 OVDD+0.6 V — — Unit 0.28 V V V Termination Voltage Vtt Vtt tracking OVDD/2 OVDD/2 – 0.04 OVDD/2 + 0.04 V Input current (no pull-up/down) Iin VI = 0 VI=OVDD — — 4.3.3 TBD TBD µA Low Voltage I/O (LVIO) DC Parameters The parameters in Table 20 are guaranteed per the operating ranges in Table 13, unless otherwise noted. Table 20. LVIO DC Electrical Characteristics DC Electrical Characteristics Symbol Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit High-level output voltage Voh Iout = –1 mA OVDD–0.15 — — V Low-level output voltage Vol Iout = 1 mA — — 0.15 V I Vout = 0.8 × OVDD Low Drive Medium Drive High Drive Max Drive — — –2.1 –4.2 –6.3 –8.4 Iol Vout = 0.2 × OVDD Low Drive Medium Drive High Drive Max Drive 2.1 4.2 6.3 8.4 High-Level DC input voltage1 VIH — 0.7 × OVDD — OVDD V Low-Level DC input voltage 1 VIL — 0 — 0.3 × OVDD V VHYS OVDD = 1.875 OVDD = 2.775 0.35 0.62 1.27 — V High-level output current Ioh Low-level output current Input Hysteresis I mA — — mA i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 24 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 20. LVIO DC Electrical Characteristics (continued) DC Electrical Characteristics Symbol Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Schmitt trigger VT+ 1, 2 VT+ — 0.5 × OVDD — — V VT– 1, 2 VT– — — — 0.5 × OVDD V Input current (no pull-up/down) IIN VI = 0 or OVDD — — TBD μA Input current (22 kΩ Pull-up) IIN VI = 0 VI = OVDD — — 16 TBD μA Input current (47 kΩ Pull-up) IIN VI = 0 VI = OVDD — — 76 TBD μA Input current (100 kΩ Pull-up) IIN VI = 0 VI = OVDD — — 36 TBD μA Input current (100 kΩ Pull-down) IIN VI = 0 VI = OVDD — — TBD 36 μA Keeper Circuit Resistance — OVDD = 1.875V OVDD = 2.775V — — 22 17 — — kΩ Schmitt trigger 1 To maintain a valid level, the transition edge of the input must sustain a constant slew rate (monotonic) from the current DC level through to the target DC level, VIL or VIH. Monotonic input transition time is from 0.1 ns to 1 s. 2 Hysteresis of 250 mV is guaranteed over all operating conditions when hysteresis is enabled. 4.3.4 Ultra-High Voltage I/O (UHVIO) DC Parameters The parameters in Table 21 are guaranteed per the operating ranges in Table 13, unless otherwise noted. Table 21. UHVIO DC Electrical Characteristics1 DC Electrical Characteristics Symbol Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit High-level output voltage Voh Iout = –1mA OVDD–0.15 — — V Low-level output voltage Vol Iout = 1mA — — 0.15 V Vout = 0.8 × OVDD Low Drive Medium Drive High Drive — — Ioh_lv –2.2 –4.4 –6.6 Vout = 0.8 × OVDD Low Drive Medium Drive High Drive –5.1 –10.2 –15.3 Vout = 0.2 × OVDD Low Drive Medium Drive High Drive 2.2 4.4 6.6 Vout = 0.2 × OVDD Low Drive Medium Drive High Drive 5.1 10.2 15.3 — 0.7 × OVDD High-level output current, low voltage mode High-level output current, high voltage mode Ioh_hv Low-level output current, low voltage mode Iol_lv Low-level output current, high voltage mode Iol_hv High-Level DC input voltage2,3 VIH mA — — mA — — mA — — mA — OVDD V i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 25 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 21. UHVIO DC Electrical Characteristics1 (continued) DC Electrical Characteristics Symbol Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit VIL — 0 — 0.3 × OVDD V VHYS low voltage mode high voltage mode 0.38 0.95 — 0.43 1.33 V Schmitt trigger VT+2,4 VT+ — 0.5OVDD — — V Schmitt trigger VT–2,4 VT– — — — 0.5 × OVDD V Input current (no pull-up/down) IIN VI = 0 VI = OVDD — — TBD μA Input current (22 kΩ Pull-up) IIN VI = 0 VI = OVDD — — 202 TBD μA Input current (75 kΩ Pull-up) IIN VI = 0 VI = OVDD — — 61 TBD μA Input current (100 kΩ Pull-up) IIN VI = 0 VI = OVDD — — 47 TBD μA Input current (360 kΩ Pull-down) IIN VI = 0 VI = OVDD — — TBD 5.7 μA Keeper Circuit Resistance — NA — 17 — kΩ Low-Level DC input voltage2,3 Input Hysteresis 1 This table applies with VCC down to 0.9 V. UHVIO are functional down to 0.85 V with degraded performance. To maintain a valid level, the transitioning edge of the input must sustain a constant slew rate (monotonic) from the current DC level through to the target DC level, VIL or VIH. Monotonic input transition time is from 0.1 ns to 1 s. 3 Overshoot and undershoot conditions (transitions above OVDD and below OVSS) on switching pads must be held below 0.6 V, and the duration of the overshoot/undershoot must not exceed 10% of the system clock cycle. Overshoot/undershoot must be controlled through printed circuit board layout, transmission line impedance matching, signal line termination, or other methods. Non-compliance to this specification may affect device reliability or cause permanent damage to the device. 4 Hysteresis of 250 mV is guaranteed over all operating conditions when hysteresis is enabled. 2 4.3.5 I2C I/O DC Parameters NOTE See the errata for HS-I2C in i.MX51 Chip Errata document. The two standard I2C modules have no errata The DC Electrical Characteristics listed below are guaranteed using operating ranges per Table 13, unless otherwise noted. Table 22. I2C Standard/Fast/High-Speed Mode Electrical Parameters for Low/Medium Drive Strength Parameter Symbol Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Low-level output voltage Vol Iol = 3mA — — 0.4 V High-Level DC input voltage 1 VIH — 0.7 × OVDD — OVDD V Low-Level DC input voltage 1 VIL — 0 — 0.3 × OVDD V VHYS — 0.25 — — V Input Hysteresis i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 26 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 22. I2C Standard/Fast/High-Speed Mode Electrical Parameters for Low/Medium Drive Strength Parameter Symbol Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit VT+ — 0.5 × OVDD — — V VT– — — — 0.5 × OVDD V Iin VI = OVDD or 0 — — TBD μA Schmitt trigger VT+1,2 Schmitt trigger VT– 1,2 I/O leakage current (no pull-up) 1 To maintain a valid level, the transitioning edge of the input must sustain a constant slew rate (monotonic) from the current DC level through to the target DC level, VIL or VIH. Monotonic input transition time is from 0.1ns to 1s. 2 Hysteresis of 250 mV is guaranteed over all operating conditions when hysteresis is enabled. 4.3.6 USBOTG Electrical DC Parameters 4.3.7 USB Port Electrical DC Characteristics Table 23 and Table 24 list the electrical DC characteristics. Table 23. USBOTG Interface Electrical Specification Parameter Symbol Signals Min Max Unit Test Conditions Input High Voltage VIH USB_VPOUT USB_VMOUT USB_XRXD, USB_VPIN, USB_VMIN VDD x 0.7 VDD V — Input low Voltage VIL USB_VPOUT USB_VMOUT USB_XRXD, USB_VPIN, USB_VMIN 0 VDD × 0.3 V — Output High Voltage VOH USB_VPOUT USB_VMOUT USB_TXENB VDD –0.43 — V 7 mA Drv at IOH = 5 mA Output Low Voltage VOL USB_VPOUT USB_VMOUT USB_TXENB — 0.43 V 7 mA Drv at IOH = 5 mA i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 27 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 24. USB Interface Electrical Specification Parameter Symbol Signals Min Max Unit Test Conditions Input High Voltage VIH USB_DAT_VP USB_SE0_VM USB_RCV, USB_VP1, USB_VM1 VDD x 0.7 VDD V — Input Low Voltage VIL USB_DAT_VP USB_SE0_VM USB_RCV, USB_VP1, USB_VM1 0 VDD x 0.3 V — Output High Voltage VOH USB_DAT_VP USB_SE0_VM USB_TXOE_B VDD –0.43 Output Low Voltage VOL USB_DAT_VP USB_SE0_VM USB_TXOE_B 4.4 — — 0.43 V 7 mA Drv at Iout = 5 mA V 7 mA Drv at Iout = 5 mA Output Buffer Impedance Characteristics This section defines the I/O Impedance parameters of the i.MX51A processor. 4.4.1 LVIO I/O Output Buffer Impedance Table 25 shows the LVIO I/O output buffer impedance. Table 25. LVIO I/O Output Buffer Impedance Typical Parameter Symbol Conditions Min Max Unit OVDD 2.775 V OVDD 1.875 V Output Driver Impedance Rpu Low Drive Strength, Ztl = 150 Ω Medium Drive Strength, Ztl = 75 Ω High Drive Strength, Ztl = 50 Ω Max Drive Strength, Ztl = 37.5 Ω 80 40 27 20 104 52 35 26 150 75 51 38 250 125 83 62 Ω Output Driver Impedance Rpd Low Drive Strength, Ztl = 150 Ω Medium Drive Strength, Ztl = 75 Ω High Drive Strength, Ztl = 50 Ω Max Drive Strength, Ztl = 37.5 Ω 64 32 21 16 88 44 30 22 134 66 44 34 243 122 81 61 Ω i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 28 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.4.2 DDR2 Output Buffer Impedance Table 26 shows the DDR2 output buffer impedance. Table 26. DDR2 I/O Output Buffer Impedance HVE = 0 Parameter Symbol Test Conditions Best Case Tj = –40 °C OVDD = 1.95 V VCC = 1.3 V Typical Tj = 25 °C OVDD = 1.8 V VCC = 1.2 V Worst Case Tj = 105 °C OVDD = 1.6 V VCC = 1.1 V s0–s5 000000 s0–s5 101010 s0–s5 111111 Unit Output Driver Impedance Rpu Low Drive Strength, Ztl = 150 Ω Medium Drive Strength, Ztl = 75 Ω High Drive Strength, Ztl = 50 Ω Max Drive Strength 185 92.5 61.7 26.5 140 70 47 19.5 111.4 55.7 37.2 15.4 Ω Output Driver Impedance Rpd Low Drive Strength, Ztl = 150 Ω Medium Drive Strength, Ztl = 75 Ω High Drive Strength, Ztl = 50 Ω Max Drive Strength 190.3 95.1 63.4 27.6 145.4 72.7 48.5 19.9 120.6 60.3 40.2 16.9 Ω 4.4.3 UHVIO Output Buffer Impedance Table 27 shows the UHVIO output buffer impedance. Table 27. UHVIO Output Buffer Impedance Min Test Conditions Typ Parameter Symbol Output Driver Impedance Rpu Low Drive Strength, Ztl = 150 Ω Medium Drive Strength, Ztl = 75 Ω High Drive Strength, Ztl = 50 Ω 98 49 32 114 57 38 Output Driver Impedance Rpd Low Drive Strength, Ztl =1 50 Ω Medium Drive Strength, Ztl = 75 Ω High Drive Strength, Ztl = 50 Ω 97 49 32 118 59 40 OVDD 1.95 V OVDD OVDD 3.0 V 1.875 V Max Unit OVDD 3.3 V OVDD 1.65 V OVDD 3.6 V 124 62 41 135 67 45 198 99 66 206 103 69 Ω 126 63 42 154 77 51 179 89 60 217 109 72 Ω NOTE Output driver impedance is measured with long transmission line of impedance Ztl attached to I/O pad and incident wave launched into transmission lime. Rpu/Rpd and Ztl form a voltage divider that defines specific voltage of incident wave relative to OVDD. Output driver impedance is calculated from this voltage divider (see Figure 3). i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 29 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics OVDD PMOS (Rpu) Ztl Ω, L = 20 inches ipp_do pad predriver Cload = 1p NMOS (Rpd) OVSS U,(V) Vin (do) VDD t,(ns) 0 U,(V) Vout (pad) OVDD Vref2 Vref1 Vref t,(ns) 0 Rpu = Vovdd – Vref1 Vref1 Rpd = Vref2 × Ztl × Ztl Vovdd – Vref2 Figure 3. Impedance Matching Load for Measurement i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 30 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.5 I/O AC Parameters The load circuit and output transition time waveforms are shown in Figure 4 and Figure 5. AC electrical characteristics for slow and fast I/O are presented in the Table 28 and Table 29, respectively. From Output Under Test Test Point CL CL includes package, probe and fixture capacitance Figure 4. Load Circuit for Output NVCC 80% 80% 20% 0V 20% Output (at I/O) tf tr Figure 5. Output Transition Time Waveform 4.5.1 Slow I/O AC Parameters Table 28 shows the slow I/O AC parameters. Table 28. Slow I/O AC Parameters Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Rise/Fall Typ Max Rise/Fall Unit Output Pad Transition Times (Max Drive) tr, tf 15 pF 35 pF — — 1.98/1.52 3.08/2.69 ns Output Pad Transition Times (High Drive) tr, tf 15 pF 35 pF — — 2.31/1.838 3.8/2.4 ns Output Pad Transition Times (Medium Drive) tr, tf 15 pF 35 pF — — 2.92/2.43 5.37/4.99 ns Output Pad Transition Times (Low Drive) tr, tf 15 pF 35 pF — — 4.93/4.53 10.55/9.79 ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Max Drive) tps 15 pF 35 pF 0.5/0.65 0.32/0.37 — — V/ns Output Pad Slew Rate (High Drive) tps 15 pF 35 pF 0.43/0.54 0.26/0.41 — — V/ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Medium Drive) tps 15 pF 35 pF 0.34/0.41 0.18/0.2 — — V/ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Low Drive) tps 15 pF 35 pF 0.20/0.22 0.09/0.1 — — V/ns Output Pad di/dt (Max Drive) tdit — — — 30 mA/ns Output Pad di/dt (High Drive) tdit — — — 23 mA/ns Output Pad di/dt (Medium drive) tdit — — — 15 mA/ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 31 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 28. Slow I/O AC Parameters (continued) Parameter Symbol Output Pad di/dt (Low drive) Input Transition 1 Times1 Test Condition Min Rise/Fall Typ Max Rise/Fall Unit tdit — — — 7 mA/ns trm — — — 25 ns Hysteresis mode is recommended for inputs with transition times greater than 25 ns. 4.5.2 Fast I/O AC Parameters Table 29 shows the fast I/O AC parameters. Table 29. Fast I/O AC Parameters Parameter Symbol Output Pad Transition Times (Max Drive) tr, tf Output Pad Transition Times (High Drive) Test Condition Min Rise/Fall Typ Max Rise/Fall Unit 15 pF 35 pF — — 1.429/1.275 2.770/2.526 ns tr, tf 15 pF 35 pF — — 1.793/1.607 3.565/3.29 ns Output Pad Transition Times (Medium Drive) tr, tf 15 pF 35 pF — — 2.542/2.257 5.252/4.918 ns Output Pad Transition Times (Low Drive) tr, tf 15 pF 35 pF — — 4.641/4.456 10.699/10.0 ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Max Drive) tps 15 pF 35 pF 0.69/0.78 0.36/0.39 — — V/ns Output Pad Slew Rate (High Drive) tps 15 pF 35 pF 0.55/0.62 0.28/0.30 — — V/ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Medium Drive) tps 15 pF 35 pF 0.39/0.44 0.19/0.20 — — V/ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Low Drive) tps 15 pF 35 pF 0.21/0.22 0.09/0.1 — — V/ns Output Pad di/dt (Max Drive) tdit — — — 70 mA/ns Output Pad di/dt (High Drive) tdit — — — 53 mA/ns Output Pad di/dt (Medium drive) tdit — — — 35 mA/ns Output Pad di/dt (Low drive) tdit — — — 18 mA/ns Input Transition Times1 trm — — — 25 ns 1 Hysteresis mode is recommended for inputs with transition time greater than 25 ns. 4.5.3 I2C AC Parameters NOTE See the errata for HS-I2C in i.MX51 Chip Errata document. The two standard I2C modules have no errata i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 32 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Figure 6 depicts the load circuit for output pads for standard- and fast-mode. Figure 7 depicts the output pad transition time definition. Figure 6 depicts pull-up current source measurement for HS-mode. Figure 8 depicts load circuit with external pull-up current source for HS-mode. Figure 9 depicts HS-mode timing definition. From Output Under Test Test Point CL CL includes package, probe and fixture capacitance Figure 6. Load Circuit for Standard- and Fast-Mode 70% OVDD Output 30% 0V tf Figure 7. Definition of Timing for Standard- and Fast-Mode OVDD 3 mA1 From Output Under Test Test Point CL2 Notes: × 1Load current when output is between 0.3 OVDD and 2CL includes package, probe, and fixture capacitance. 0.7×OVDD Figure 8. Load Circuit for HS-Mode with External Pull-Up Current Source OVDD 70% 30% Output (at pad) tTLH 70% 30% 0V tTHL PA3Max = max of tTLH and tTHL PA4Max = max tTHL Figure 9. Definition of Timing for HS-Mode i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 33 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics The electrical characteristics for I2C I/O are listed in the tables from the Table 30 to the Table 33 on page 35. Characteristics are guaranteed using operating ranges per Table 13, unless otherwise noted. Table 30. I2C Standard- and Fast-Mode Electrical Parameters for Low/Medium Drive Strength and OVDD = 2.7 V–3.3 V Parameter Symbol Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Output fall time, (low driver strength) tf from VIHmin to VILmax with CL from 10 pF to 400 pF — — 52 ns Output fall time, (medium driver strength) tf from VIHmin to VILmax with CL from 10 pF to 400 pF — — 28 ns Table 31. I2C Standard- and Fast-Mode Electrical Parameters for Low/Medium Drive Strength and OVDD = 1.65 V–1.95 V Parameter Symbol Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Output fall time, (low driver strength) tof from VIHmin to VILmax with CL from 10 pF to 400 pF — — 70 ns Output fall time, (medium driver strength) tof from VIHmin to VILmax with CL from 10 pF to 400 pF — — 35 ns Table 32. I2C High-Speed Mode Electrical Parameters for Low/Medium Drive Strength and OVDD = 2.7 V – 3.3 V Parameter Symbol Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Output rise time (current-source enabled) and fall time at SCLH (low driver strength) trCL , tfCL with a 3mA external pull-up current source and CL = 100 pF — — 18/21 ns Output rise time (current-source enabled) and fall time at SCLH (medium driver strength) trCL , tfCL with a 3mA external pull-up current source and CL = 100 pF — — 9/9 ns Output fall time at SDAH (low driver strength) tfDA with C L from 10 pF to 100 pF — — 14 ns Output fall time at SDAH (medium driver strength) tfDA with C L from 10 pF to 100 pF — — 8 ns Output fall time at SDAH (low driver strength) tfDA CL = 400 pF — — 52 ns Output fall time at SDAH (medium driver strength) tfDA CL = 400 pF — — 27 ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 34 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 33. I2C High-Speed Mode Electrical Parameters for Low/Medium Drive Strength and OVDD = 1.65 V – 1.95 V Parameter Symbol Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Output rise time (current-source enabled) and fall time at SCLH (low driver strength) trCL, tfCL with a 3mA external pull-up current source and CL = 100 pF — — 10/74 ns Output rise time (current-source enabled) and fall time at SCLH (medium driver strength) trCL, tfCL with a 3mA external pull-up current source and CL = 100 pF — — 7/14 ns Output fall time at SDAH (low driver strength) tfDA with CL from 10 pF to 100 pF 0 — 17 ns Output fall time at SDAH (medium driver strength) tfDA with CL from 10 pF to 100 pF 0 — 9 ns Output fall time at SDAH (low driver strength) tfDA CL = 400 pF 30 — 67 ns Output fall time at SDAH (medium driver strength) tfDA CL = 400 pF 15 — 34 ns Typ Max Rise/Fall Unit Table 34. Low Voltage I2C I/O Parameters Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min Rise/Fall Output Pad di/dt (Medium drive) tdit — — — 22 mA/ns Output Pad di/dt (Low drive) tdit — — — 11 mA/ns trm — — — 25 ns Input Transition 1 Times1 Hysteresis mode is recommended for inputs with transition time greater than 25 ns Table 35. High Voltage I2C I/O Parameters Parameter Symbol Typ Max Rise/Fall Unit Output Pad Transition Times (Medium Drive) tr, tf 15 pF 35 pF — — 3/3 6/5 ns Output Pad Transition Times (Low Drive) tr, tf 15 pF 35 pF — — 5/5 9/9 ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Medium Drive) tps 15 pF 35 pF 0/0 0/0 — — V/ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Low Drive) tps 15 pF 35 pF 0/0 0/0 — — V/ns Output Pad di/dt (Medium drive) tdit — — — 36 mA/ns Output Pad di/dt (Low drive) tdit — — — 16 mA/ns Input Transition Times1 trm — — — 25 ns 1 Test Condition Min Rise/Fall Hysteresis mode is recommended for inputs with transition time > 25 ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 35 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics This section contains the timing and electrical parameters for the modules in the i.MX51A processor. 4.5.4 AC Electrical Characteristics for DDR2 The load circuit for output pads, the output pad transition time waveform and the output pad propagation and transition time waveform are below. Figure 10 shows the output pad transition time waveform. Figure 10. Output Pad Transition Time Waveform Figure 11 shows the output pad propagation and transition time waveform. Figure 11. Output Pad Propagation and Transition Time Waveform i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 36 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics AC electrical characteristics in DDR2 mode for Fast mode and for ovdd=1.65-1.95V, ipp_hve=0 are placed in Table 36. Table 36. AC Electrical Characteristics of DDR2 IO Pads for Fast mode and for ovdd=1.65-1.95V (ipp_hve=0) Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min rise/fall Typ Max rise/fall Units Output Pad Transition Times 1 tpr 15pF 35pF 0.57/0.57 1.29/1.29 0.45/0.44 0.97/0.94 0.45/0.45 0.82/0.85 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay, 50%-50%1 tpo 15pF 35pF 0.98/0.96 1.47/1.50 1.27/1.19 1.63/1.57 1.89/1.72 2.20/2.07 ns Output Pad Slew Rate 1 tps 15pF 35pF 2.05/2.05 0.91/0.91 2.40/2.45 1.11/1.15 2.20/2.20 1.21/1.16 V/ns Output Pad di/dt 1 di/dt 390 201 99 mA/ns 0.212/0.213 ns Input Pad Transition Times 2 trfi 1.2 pF 0.09/0.09 0.132/0.128 Input Pad Propagation Delay without Hysteresis (CMOS input), 50%-50% 2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.45/0.93 0.6/0.58 0.9/0.88 ns Input Pad Propagation Delay with Hysteresis (CMOS input), 50%-50% 2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.55/0.55 0.71/0.7 1.03/0.98 ns Input Pad Propagation Delay (DDR input), 50%-50%2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.38/0.38 0.58/0.61 1.014/1.07 ns Maximum Input Transition Times3 trm 5 ns 1 Max condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V, 105 °C and s0-s5=111111. Typ condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V, 25 °C and s0-s5=101010. Min condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V, -40 °C and s0-s5=000000. 2 Max condition for trfi and tpi: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V and 105 °C. Typ condition for trfi and tpi: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V and 25 °C. Min condition for trfi and tpi: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V and -40 °C. 3 Hysteresis mode is recommended for input with transition time greater than 25 ns. AC electrical characteristics in DDR2 mode for Slow mode and for ovdd=1.65-1.95V, ipp_hve=0 are placed in Table 37: Table 37. AC Electrical Characteristics of DDR2 IO Pads for Slow Mode and for ovdd=1.65-1.95V (ipp_hve=0) Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min rise/fall Typ Max rise/fall Units Output Pad Transition Times1 tpr 15pF 35pF 0.75/0.76 1.39/1.40 0.70/0.74 1.18/1.21 1.06/1.00 1.49/1.47 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay, 50%-50%1 tpo 15pF 35pF 1.50/1.55 2.05/2.16 1.90/1.95 2.36/2.48 3.23/3.10 3.82/3.75 ns Output Pad Slew Rate1 tps 15pF 35pF 1.56/1.54 0.84/0.84 1.54/1.46 0.92/0.89 0.93/0.99 0.66/0.67 V/ns Output Pad di/dt1 di/dt 82 40 19 mA/ns Input Pad Transition Times2 trfi 1.2 pF 0.09/0.09 0.132/0.128 0.212/0.213 ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 37 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 37. AC Electrical Characteristics of DDR2 IO Pads for Slow Mode and for ovdd=1.65-1.95V (ipp_hve=0) (continued) Symbol Test Condition Min rise/fall Typ Max rise/fall Units Input Pad Propagation Delay without Hysteresis (CMOS input), 50%-50%2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.45/0.93 0.6/0.58 0.9/0.88 ns Input Pad Propagation Delay with Hysteresis (CMOS input), 50%-50%2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.55/0.55 0.71/0.7 1.03/0.98 ns Input Pad Propagation Delay (DDR input), 50%-50%2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.38/0.38 0.58/0.61 1.014/1.07 ns Maximum Input Transition Times3 trm 5 ns Parameter 1 Max condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V, 105 °C and s0-s5=111111. Typ condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V, 25 °C and s0-s5=101010. Min condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V, -40 °C and s0-s5=000000. 2 Max condition for trfi and tpi: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V and 105 °C. Typ condition for trfi and tpi: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V and 25 °C. Min condition for trfi and tpi: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V and -40 °C. 3 Hysteresis mode is recommended for input with transition time greater than 25 ns. AC electrical characteristics in DDR mobile for Fast mode and ovdd=1.65-1.95V, ipp_hve=0 are placed in Table 38. Table 38. AC Electrical Characteristics of DDR mobile IO Pads for Fast Mode and ovdd=1.65-1.95V (ipp_hve=0) Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min rise/fall Typ Max rise/fall Units Output Pad Transition Times (High Drive)1 tpr 15pF 35pF 1.35/1.31 2.99/2.94 1.02/1.03 2.28/2.29 0.89/0.89 1.85/1.94 ns Output Pad Transition Times (Medium Drive)1 tpr 15pF 35pF 2.00/1.99 4.55/4.44 1.56/1.53 3.38/3.45 1.28/1.32 2.79/2.85 ns Output Pad Transition Times (Low Drive)1 tpr 15pF 35pF 4.08/3.92 8.93/8.95 3.11/3.06 6.84/6.81 2.50/2.61 5.56/5.76 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay (High Drive)1 tpo 15pF 35pF 1.54/1.52 2.69/2.75 1.73/1.62 2.59/2.55 2.36/2.09 3.04/2.86 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay (Medium Drive)1 tpo 15pF 35pF 2.00/2.02 3.75/3.86 2.08/2.00 3.38/3.39 2.64/2.40 3.65/3.56 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay (Low Drive)1 tpo 15pF 35pF 3.43/3.52 6.92/7.20 3.13/3.13 5.72/5.94 3.47/3.34 5.49/5.65 ns Output Pad Slew Rate (High Drive)1 tps 15pF 35pF 0.87/0.89 0.39/0.40 1.06/1.05 0.47/0.47 1.11/1.11 0.54/0.51 V/ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Medium Drive)1 tps 15pF 35pF 0.58/0.59 0.26/0.26 0.69/0.71 0.32/0.31 0.77/0.75 0.35/0.35 V/ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Low Drive)1 tps 15pF 35pF 0.29/0.30 0.13/0.13 0.35/0.35 0.16/0.16 0.40/0.38 0.18/0.17 V/ns Output Pad di/dt (High Drive)1 di/dt 185 91 46 mA/ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 38 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 38. AC Electrical Characteristics of DDR mobile IO Pads for Fast Mode and ovdd=1.65-1.95V (ipp_hve=0) (continued) Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min rise/fall Typ Max rise/fall Units Output Pad di/dt (Medium drive)1 di/dt 124 61 31 mA/ns Output Pad di/dt (Low drive)1 di/dt 62 30 16 mA/ns Times2 trfi 1.2 pF 0.09/0.09 0.132/0.128 0.212/0.213 ns Input Pad Propagation Delay without Hysteresis (CMOS input), 50%-50%2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.45/0.93 0.6/0.58 0.9/0.88 ns Input Pad Propagation Delay with Hysteresis (CMOS input), 50%-50%2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.55/0.55 0.71/0.7 1.03/0.98 ns Input Pad Propagation Delay (DDR input), 50%-50%2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.38/0.38 0.58/0.61 1.014/1.07 Maximum Input Transition Times3 trm Input Pad Transition 5 ns 1 Max condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V, 105 °C and s0-s5=111111. Typ condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V, 25 °C and s0-s5=101010. Min condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V, -40 °C and s0-s5=000000. 2 Max condition for trfi and tpi: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V and 105 °C. Typ condition for trfi and tpi: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V and 25 °C. Min condition for trfi and tpi: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V and -40 °C. 3 Hysteresis mode is recommended for input with transition time greater than 25 ns. AC electrical characteristics in DDR mobile for Slow mode and ovdd=1.65-1.95V, ipp_hve=0 are placed in Table 39. Table 39. AC Electrical Characteristics of DDR mobile IO Pads for Slow Mode ovdd=1.65-1.95V (ipp_hve=0) Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min rise/fall Typ Max rise/fall Units Output Pad Transition Times (High Drive)1 tpr 15pF 35pF 1.42/1.43 3.03/2.92 1.20/1.27 2.39/2.38 1.43/1.49 2.35/2.46 ns Output Pad Transition Times (Medium Drive)1 tpr 15pF 35pF 2.04/2.04 4.51/4.49 1.68/1.74 3.47/3.50 1.82/1.91 3.16/3.30 ns Output Pad Transition Times (Low Drive)1 tpr 15pF 35pF 4.08/3.93 9.06/8.93 3.16/3.19 6.92/6.93 2.90/3.01 5.74/5.96 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay (High Drive)1 tpo 15pF 35pF 2.00/2.17 3.15/3.42 2.33/2.50 3.24/3.52 3.70/3.70 4.63/4.75 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay (Medium Drive)1 tpo 15pF 35pF 2.47/2.68 4.2/4.53 2.72/2.92 4.01/4.37 4.10/4.16 5.33/5.55 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay (Low Drive)1 tpo 15pF 35pF 3.87/4.18 7.32/7.86 3.78/4.10 6.35/6.90 5.13/5.30 7.25/7.73 ns Output Pad Slew Rate (High Drive)1 tps 15pF 35pF 0.82/0.82 0.39/0.40 0.90/0.85 0.45/0.49 0.69/0.66 0.42/0.40 V/ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 39 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 39. AC Electrical Characteristics of DDR mobile IO Pads for Slow Mode ovdd=1.65-1.95V (ipp_hve=0) (continued) Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min rise/fall Typ Max rise/fall Units Output Pad Slew Rate (Medium Drive)1 tps 15pF 35pF 0.57/0.57 0.26/0.26 0.70/0.62 0.31/0.31 0.54/0.52 0.31/0.30 V/ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Low Drive)1 tps 15pF 35pF 0.29/0.30 0.13/0.13 0.34/0.34 0.16/0.16 0.34/0.33 0.17/0.17 V/ns Output Pad di/dt (High Drive)1 di/dt 47 14 9 mA/ns di/dt 27 9 6 mA/ns di/dt 12 5 3 mA/ns Output Pad di/dt (Medium drive)1 Output Pad di/dt (Low drive)1 Times2 trfi 1.2 pF 0.09/0.09 0.132/0.128 0.212/0.213 ns Input Pad Propagation Delay without Hysteresis (CMOS input), 50%-50%2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.45/0.93 0.6/0.58 0.9/0.88 ns Input Pad Propagation Delay with Hysteresis (CMOS input), 50%-50%2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.55/0.55 0.71/0.7 1.03/0.98 ns Input Pad Propagation Delay (DDR input), 50%-50%2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.38/0.38 0.58/0.61 1.014/1.07 Maximum Input Transition Times3 trm Input Pad Transition 5 ns 1 Max condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V, 105 °C and s0-s5=111111. Typ condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V, 25 °C and s0-s5=101010. Min condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V, -40 °C and s0-s5=000000. 2 Max condition for trfi and tpi: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V and 105 °C. Typ condition for trfi and tpi: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V and 25 °C. Min condition for trfi and tpi: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V and -40 °C. 3 Hysteresis mode is recommended for input with transition time greater than 25 ns. AC electrical characteristics in DDR2 mode for Fast mode and for ovdd=1.65-1.95V, ipp_hve=0 are placed in Table 40. Table 40. AC Electrical Characteristics of DDR2_clk IO Pads for Fast mode and for ovdd=1.65-1.95V Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min rise/fall Typ Max rise/fall Units Output Pad Transition Times1 tpr 15pF 35pF 0.58/0.57 1.29/1.28 0.45/0.44 0.97/0.93 0.45/0.45 0.82/0.85 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay, 50%-50%1 tpo 15pF 35pF 1.05/1.03 1.54/1.56 1.40/1.31 1.75/1.69 2.12/1.96 2.43/2.31 ns Output Pad Slew Rate1 tps 15pF 35pF 2.02/2.05 0.91/0.91 2.40/2.45 1.11/1.16 2.20/2.20 1.21/1.16 V/ns Output Pad di/dt1 di/dt 390 201 99 mA/ns Input Pad Transition Times2 trfi 1.2 pF 0.09/0.09 0.132/0.128 0.212/0.213 ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 40 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 40. AC Electrical Characteristics of DDR2_clk IO Pads for Fast mode and for ovdd=1.65-1.95V (continued) Symbol Test Condition Min rise/fall Typ Max rise/fall Units Input Pad Propagation Delay (DDR input), 50%-50%2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.3/0.36 0.5/0.52 0.82/0.94 ns Maximum Input Transition Times3 trm 5 ns Parameter 1 Max condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V, 105 °C and s0-s5=111111. Typ condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V, 25 °C and s0-s5=101010. Min condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V, -40 °C and s0-s5=000000. 2 Max condition for trfi and tpi: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V and 105 °C. Typ condition for trfi and tpi: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V and 25 °C. Min condition for trfi and tpi: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V and -40 °C. 3 Hysteresis mode is recommended for input with transition time greater than 25 ns. AC electrical characteristics in DDR2 mode for Slow mode and for ovdd=1.65-1.95V, ipp_hve=0 are placed in Table 41. Table 41. AC Electrical Characteristics of DDR2_clk IO Pads for Slow mode and for ovdd=1.65-1.95V (ipp_hve=0) Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min rise/fall Typ Max rise/fall Units Output Pad Transition Times1 tpr 15pF 35pF 0.74/0.76 1.40/1.39 0.69/0.72 1.18/1.20 1.04/1.01 1.48/1.47 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay, 50%-50%1 tpo 15pF 35pF 1.56/1.61 2.12/2.22 2.02/2.08 2.49/2.61 3.45/3.33 4.05/3.98 ns Output Pad Slew Rate1 tps 15pF 35pF 1.58/1.54 0.84/0.84 1.57/1.50 0.92/0.90 0.95/0.98 0.67/0.67 V/ns Output Pad di/dt1 di/dt 82 40 19 mA/ns Times2 trfi 1.2 pF 0.09/0.09 0.132/0.128 0.212/0.213 ns Input Pad Propagation Delay (DDR input), 50%-50%2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.3/0.36 0.82/0.94 ns Maximum Input Transition Times3 trm 5 ns Input Pad Transition 0.5/0.52 1 Max condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V, 105 °C and s0-s5=111111. Typ condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V, 25 °C and s0-s5=101010. Min condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V, -40 °C and s0-s5=000000. 2 Max condition for trfi and tpi: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V and 105 °C. Typ condition for trfi and tpi: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V and 25 °C. Min condition for trfi and tpi: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V and -40 °C. 3 Hysteresis mode is recommended for input with transition time greater than 25 ns. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 41 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics AC electrical characteristics in DDR mobile for Fast mode and ovdd=1.65-1.95V, ipp_hve=0 are placed in Table 42. Table 42. AC Electrical Characteristics of DDR_clk mobile IO Pads for Fast mode and ovdd=1.65-1.95V (ipp_hve=0) Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min rise/fall Typ Max rise/fall Units Output Pad Transition Times (High Drive)1 tpr 15pF 35pF 1.35/1.32 3.01/2.96 1.03/1.03 2.29/2.30 0.89/0.89 1.84/1.92 ns Output Pad Transition Times (Medium Drive)1 tpr 15pF 35pF 1.98/1.98 4.52/4.38 1.55/1.54 3.46/3.45 1.29/1.30 2.80/2.88 ns Output Pad Transition Times (Low Drive)1 tpr 15pF 35pF 3.99/3.94 8.93/8.86 3.10/3.04 6.77/6.85 2.50/2.57 5.40/5.68 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay (High Drive)1 tpo 15pF 35pF 1.60/1.58 2.74/2.81 1.85/1.74 2.71/2.67 2.58/2.31 3.26/3.08 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay (Medium Drive)1 tpo 15pF 35pF 2.07/2.08 3.79/3.92 2.19/2.12 3.46/3.51 2.86/2.62 3.87/3.77 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay (Low Drive)1 tpo 15pF 35pF 3.47/3.57 6.94/7.26 3.23/3.25 5.84/6.06 3.69/3.55 5.73/5.87 ns Output Pad Slew Rate (High Drive)1 tps 15pF 35pF 0.87/0.89 0.39/0.40 1.05/1.05 0.47/0.47 1.11/1.11 0.54/0.52 V/ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Medium Drive)1 tps 15pF 35pF 0.59/0.59 0.26/0.27 0.70/0.70 0.31/0.31 0.77/0.76 0.35/0.34 V/ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Low Drive)1 tps 15pF 35pF 0.29/0.30 0.13/0.13 0.35/0.36 0.16/0.16 0.40/0.39 0.18/0.17 V/ns Output Pad di/dt (High Drive)1 di/dt 185 91 46 mA/ns di/dt 124 61 31 mA/ns di/dt 62 30 16 mA/ns Output Pad di/dt (Medium drive)1 Output Pad di/dt (Low drive)1 Input Pad Transition Times2 trfi 1.2 pF 0.09/0.09 0.132/0.128 0.212/0.213 Input Pad Propagation Delay (DDR input), 50%-50%2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.3/0.36 Maximum Input Transition Times3 trm 0.5/0.52 ns 0.82/0.94 5 ns 1 Max condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V, 105 °C and s0-s5=111111. Typ condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V, 25 °C and s0-s5=101010. Min condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V, -40 °C and s0-s5=000000. 2 Max condition for trfi and tpi: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V and 105 °C. Typ condition for trfi and tpi: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V and 25 °C. Min condition for trfi and tpi: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V and -40 °C. 3 Hysteresis mode is recommended for input with transition time greater than 25 ns. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 42 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics AC electrical characteristics in DDR mobile for Slow mode and ovdd=1.65-1.95V, ipp_hve=0 are placed in Table 43. Table 43. AC Electrical Characteristics of DDR mobile IO Pads for Slow Mode and ovdd=1.65-1.95V (ipp_hve=0) Parameter Symbol Test Condition Min rise/fall Typ Max rise/fall Units Output Pad Transition Times (High Drive)1 tpr 15pF 35pF 1.42/1.42 3.01/2.96 1.20/1.27 2.38/2.40 1.43/1.49 2.37/2.44 ns Output Pad Transition Times (Medium Drive)1 tpr 15pF 35pF 2.05/2.04 4.50/4.42 1.67/1.71 3.48/3.52 1.82/1.87 3.16/3.28 ns Output Pad Transition Times (Low Drive)1 tpr 15pF 35pF 4.06/3.98 8.94/8.86 3.15/3.17 6.92/6.93 2.92/ 3.02 5.69/5.96 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay (High Drive)1 tpo 15pF 35pF 2.07/2.23 3.21/3.48 2.46/2.62 3.35/3.63 3.92/3.93 4.84/4.97 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay (Medium Drive)1 tpo 15pF 35pF 2.53/2.74 4.26/4.58 2.83/3.04 4.12/4.49 4.32/4.35 5.55/5.76 ns Output Pad Propagation Delay (Low Drive)1 tpo 15pF 35pF 3.93/4.23 7.38/7.91 3.89/4.21 6.43/7.01 5.37/5.51 7.45/7.94 ns Output Pad Slew Rate (High Drive)1 tps 15pF 35pF 0.82/0.82 0.39/0.40 0.90/0.85 0.45/0.45 0.69/0.66 0.42/0.41 V/ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Medium Drive)1 tps 15pF 35pF 0.57/0.57 0.26/0.26 0.65/0.63 0.31/0.31 0.54/0.53 0.31/0.30 V/ns Output Pad Slew Rate (Low Drive)1 tps 15pF 35pF 0.29/0.29 0.13/0.13 0.34/0.34 0.16/0.16 0.34/0.33 0.17/0.17 V/ns Output Pad di/dt (High Drive)1 di/dt 47 14 9 mA/ns di/dt 27 9 6 mA/ns di/dt 12 5 3 mA/ns Output Pad di/dt (Medium drive)1 Output Pad di/dt (Low drive)1 Input Pad Transition Times2 trfi 1.2 pF 0.09/0.09 0.132/0.128 0.212/0.213 Input Pad Propagation Delay (DDR input), 50%-50%2 tpi 1.2 pF 0.3/0.36 Maximum Input Transition Times3 trm 0.5/0.52 ns 0.82/0.94 5 ns 1 Max condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V, 105 °C and s0-s5=111111. Typ condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V, 25 °C and s0-s5=101010. Min condition for tpr, tpo, tps and didt: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V, -40 °C and s0-s5=000000. 2 Max condition for trfi and tpi: wcs model, 1.1 V, IO 1.65 V and 105 °C. Typ condition for trfi and tpi: typ model, 1.2 V, IO 1.8 V and 25 °C. Min condition for trfi and tpi: bcs model, 1.3 V, IO 1.95 V and -40 °C. 3 Hysteresis mode is recommended for input with transition time greater than 25 ns. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 43 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.6 Module Timing 4.6.1 Reset Timings Parameters Figure 12 shows the reset timing and Table 44 lists the timing parameters. RESET_IN (Input) CC1 Figure 12. Reset Timing Diagram Table 44. Reset Timing Parameters ID CC1 4.6.2 Parameter Duration of RESET_IN to be qualified as valid (input slope = 5 ns) Min Max Unit 50 — ns WDOG Reset Timing Parameters Figure 13 shows the WDOG reset timing and Table 45 lists the timing parameters. WATCHDOG_RST (Input) CC5 Figure 13. WATCHDOG_RST Timing Diagram Table 45. WATCHDOG_RST Timing Parameters ID CC5 Parameter Duration of WATCHDOG_RESET Assertion Min Max Unit 1 — TCKIL NOTE CKIL is approximately 32 kHz. TCKIL is one period or approximately 30 μs. 4.6.3 AUDMUX Timing Parameters The AUDMUX provides a programmable interconnect logic for voice, audio and data routing between internal serial interfaces (SSIs) and external serial interfaces (audio and voice codecs). The AC timing of AUDMUX external pins is hence governed by the SSI module. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 44 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.6.4 Clock Amplifier Parameters (CKIH1, CKIH2) The input to Clock Amplifier (CAMP) is internally ac-coupled allowing direct interface to a square wave or sinusoidal frequency source. No external series capacitors are required Table 46. CAMP Electrical Parameters (CKIH1, CKIH2) Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Input frequency 8.0 — 40.0 MHz VIL (for square wave input) 0 — 0.3 V VIH (for square wave input) NVCC_PER3 - 0.25 — NVCC_PER3 V — VDD Vp-p 50 55 % Sinusoidal input amplitude 0.4 Output duty cycle 1 1 45 This value of the sinusoidal input is determined during characterization. 4.6.5 DPLL Electrical Parameters Table 47. DPLL Electrical Parameters Parameter Test Conditions/Remarks Min Typ Max Unit Reference clock frequency range1 — 10 — 100 MHz Reference clock frequency range after pre-divider — 10 — 40 MHz Output clock frequency range (dpdck_2) — 300 — 1025 MHz Pre-division factor 2 — 1 — 16 — Multiplication factor integer part — 5 — 15 — –67108862 — 67108862 — — 1 — 67108863 — — 48.5 50 51.5 % Frequency lock (FOL mode or non-integer MF) — — — 398 Tdpdref Phase lock time — — — 100 µs Frequency jitter5 (peak value) — — 0.02 0.04 Tdck Phase jitter (peak value) FPL mode, integer and fractional MF — 2.0 3.5 ns Power dissipation fdck = 300 MHz @ avdd = 1.8 V, dvdd = 1.2 V fdck = 650 MHz @ avdd = 1.8 V, dvdd = 1.2 V — — 0.65 (avdd) 0.92 (dvdd) 1.98 (avdd) 1.8 (dvdd) mW Multiplication factor numerator3 Multiplication factor denominator2 Output Duty Cycle time4 1 2 Should be less than denominator Device input range cannot exceed the electrical specifications of the CAMP, see Table 46. The values specified here are internal to DPLL. Inside the DPLL, a “1” is added to the value specified by the user.Therefore, the user has to enter a value “1” less than the desired value at the inputs of DPLL for PDF and MFD. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 45 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 3 The maximum total multiplication factor (MFI + MFN/MFD) allowed is 15.Therefore, if the MFI value is 15, MFN value must be zero. 4 Tdpdref is the time period of the reference clock after predivider.According to the specification, the maximum lock time in FOL mode is 398 cycles of divided reference clock when DPLL starts after full reset. 5 Tdck is the time period of the output clock, dpdck_2. 4.6.6 NAND Flash Controller (NFC) Parameters This section provides the relative timing requirements among different signals of NFC at the module level in the different operational modes. Timing parameters in Figure 14, through Figure 17, Figure 19, and Table 49 show the default NFC mode (asymmetric mode) using two Flash clock cycles per one access of RE_B and WE_B. Timing parameters in Figure 14, Figure 15, Figure 16, Figure 18, Figure 19, and Table 49 show symmetric NFC mode using one Flash clock cycle per one access of RE_B and WE_B. With reference to the timing diagrams, a high is defined as 80% of signal value and low is defined as 20% of signal value. All parameters are given in nanoseconds. The BGA contact load used in calculations is 20 pF (except for NF16 - 40 pF) and there is max drive strength on all contacts. All timing parameters are a function of T, which is the period of the flash_clk clock (“enfc_clk” at system level). This clock frequency can be controlled by the user, configuring CCM (SoC clock controller). The clock is derived from emi_slow_clk after single divider. Table 48 demonstrates few examples for clock frequency settings. Table 48. NFC Clock Settings Examples 1 emi_slow_clk (MHz) nfc_podf (Division Factor) enfc_clk (MHz) T—Clock Period (ns)1 133 (max value) 5 (reset value) 26.6 38 133 4 33.25 31 133 3 44.33 23 Rounded up to whole nanoseconds. NOTE A potential limitation for minimum clock frequency may exist for some devices. When the clock frequency is too low the actual data bus capturing might occur after the specified trhoh (RE_B high to output hold) period. Setting the clock frequency above 25.6 MHz (T = 39 ns) guarantees proper operation for devices having trhoh > 15 ns. It is also recommended to set the NFC_FREQ_SEL Fuse accordingly to initiate the boot with 33.33 MHz clock. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 46 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Lower frequency operation can be supported for most available devices in the market, relying on data lines Bus-Keeper logic. This depends on device behavior on the data bus in the time interval between data output valid to data output high-Z state. In NAND device parameters this period is marked between trhoh and trhz (RE_B high to output high-Z). In most devices, the data transition from valid value to high-Z occurs without going through other states. Setting the data bus pads to Bus-Keeper mode in the IOMUX registers, keeps the data bus valid internally after the specified hold time, allowing proper capturing with slower clock. NFCLE NF2 NF1 NF3 NF4 NFCE_B NF5 NFWE_B NF8 NFIO[7:0] NF9 command Figure 14. Command Latch Cycle Timing NF4 NF3 NFCE_B NF10 NF11 NF5 NFWE_B NF7 NF6 NFALE NF8 NFIO[7:0] NF9 Address Figure 15. Address Latch Cycle Timing i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 47 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics NF3 NFCE_B NF10 NF11 NF5 NFWE_B NF8 NFIO[15:0] NF9 Data to NF Figure 16. Write Data Latch Timing NFCE_B NF14 NF15 NF13 NFRE_B NF17 NF16 NFRB_B NF12 NFIO[15:0] Data from NF Figure 17. Read Data Latch Timing - asymmetric mode. NFCE_B NF14 NF15 NF13 NFRE_B NF16 NF18 NFRB_B NF12 NFIO[15:0] Data from NF Figure 18. Read Data Latch Timing - Symmetric Mode. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 48 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics NF19 NFCLE NF20 NFCE_B NFWE_B NF21 NF22 NFRE_B NFRB_B Figure 19. Other Timing Parameters. Table 49. NFC—Timing Characteristics ID PARAMETER Symbol Asymmetric Mode Min Symmetric Mode Min Max NF1 NFCLE setup Time tCLS 2T-1 2T-1 — NF2 NFCLE Hold Time tCLH T-4.45 T-4.45 — NF3 NFCE_B Setup Time tCS 2T-1 T-1 — NF4 NFCE_B Hold Time tCH 2T-5.55 0.5T-5.55 — NF5 NFWE_B Pulse Width tWP T-2.5 0.5T-1.5 — NF6 NFALE Setup Time tALS 2T-2.7 2T-2.7 — NF7 NFALE Hold Time tALH T-4.45 T-4.45 — NF8 Data Setup Time tDS T-2.25 0.5T-2.25 — NF9 Data Hold Time tDH T-6.55 0.5T-5.55 — NF10 Write Cycle Time tWC 2T T — NF11 NFWE_B Hold Time tWH T-1.25 0.5T-1.25 — NF12 Ready to NFRE_B Low tRR 9T 9T — NF13 NFRE_B Pulse Width tRP 1.5T-2.7 0.5T — NF14 READ Cycle Time tRC 2T T — NF15 NFRE_B High Hold Time tREH 0.5T-1.5 0.5T-1.5 — NF161 Data Setup on READ tDSR 11.2+0.5T-Tdl2 11.2-Tdl2 — NF173 Data Hold on READ tDHR 0 - 2Taclk+T NF184 Data Hold on READ tDHR - Tdl2 2Taclk+T NF19 CLE to RE delay tCLR 13T 13T — NF20 CE to RE delay tCRE T-3.45 1.5T-3.45 — i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 49 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 49. NFC—Timing Characteristics (continued) ID PARAMETER Symbol Asymmetric Mode Min Symmetric Mode Min NF21 WE high to RE low tWHR 14T-5.45 14T-5.45 NF22 WE high to busy tWB — — Max 6T 1 tDSR is calculated by the following formula: Asymmetric mode: tDSR = tREpd + tDpd + 1/2T - Tdl2 Symmetric mode: tDSR = tREpd + tDpd - Tdl2 tREpd + tDpd = 11.2 ns (including clock skew) where tREpd is RE propogation delay in the chip including IO pad delay, and tDpd is Data propogation delay from IO pad to EMI including IO pad delay. tDSR can be used to determine tREA max parameter with the following formula: tREA = 1.5T - tDSR. 2 Tdl is composed of 4 delay-line units each generates an equal delay with min 1.25 ns and max 1 aclk period (T aclk). Default is 1/4 aclk period for each delay-line unit, so all 4 delay lines together generates a total of 1 aclk period. T aclk is “emi_slow_clk” of the system, which default value is 7.5 ns (133MHz). 3 NF17 is defined only in asymmetric operation mode. NF17 max value is equivalent to max tRHZ value that can be used with NFC. Taclk is “emi_slow_clk” of the system. 4 NF18 is defined only in Symmetric operation mode. Tdl2 - (tREpd + tDpd) tDHR (MIN) is calculated by the following formula: where tREpd is RE propogation delay in the chip including IO pad delay, and tDpd is Data propogation delay from IO pad to EMI including IO pad delay. NF18 max value is equivalent to max tRHZ value that can be used with NFC. Taclk is “emi_slow_clk” of the system. 4.6.7 4.6.7.1 External Interface Module (WEIM) WEIM Signal Cross Reference Table 50 is a guide to help the user identify signals in the WEIM Chapter of the Reference Manual Chapter that are the same as those mentioned in this data sheet. Table 50. WEIM Signal Cross Reference Reference Manual WEIM Chapter Nomenclature BCLK Data Sheet Nomenclature, Reference Manual External Signals and Pin Multiplexing Chapter, and IOMUX Controller Chapter Nomenclature EIM_BCLK CSx EIM_CSx WE_B EIM_RW OE_B EIM_OE BEy_B EIM_EBx ADV EIM_LBA ADDR EIM_A[27:16], EIM_DA[15:0] ADDR/M_DATA EIM_DAx (Addr/Data muxed mode) i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 50 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 50. WEIM Signal Cross Reference (continued) Data Sheet Nomenclature, Reference Manual External Signals and Pin Multiplexing Chapter, and IOMUX Controller Chapter Nomenclature Reference Manual WEIM Chapter Nomenclature DATA EIM_NFC_D (Data bus shared with NAND Flash) EIM_Dx (dedicated data bus) WAIT_B 4.6.7.2 EIM_WAIT WEIM Internal Module Multiplexing Table 51 provides WEIM internal muxing information. Table 51. WEIM Internal Module Multiplexing Package Signal Name EIM 16-Bit MUXed Data/Address EIM 16-Bit Non-MUXed Data/Address EIM 32-Bit MUXed Data/Address EIM MUXed to NAND Flash DATA EIM_DA0 DA0 A0 DA0 — EIM_DA1 DA1 A1 DA1 — EIM_DA2 DA2 A2 DA2 — EIM_DA3 DA3 A3 DA3 — EIM_DA4 DA4 A4 DA4 — EIM_DA5 DA5 A5 DA5 — EIM_DA6 DA6 A6 DA6 — EIM_DA7 DA7 A7 DA7 — EIM_DA8 DA8 A8 DA8 — EIM_DA9 DA9 A9 DA9 — EIM_DA10 DA10 A10 DA10 — EIM_DA11 DA11 A11 DA11 — EIM_DA12 DA12 A12 DA12 — EIM_DA13 DA13 A13 DA13 — EIM_DA14 DA14 A14 DA14 — EIM_DA15 DA15 A15 DA15 — EIM_D16 — D0 D16 — EIM_D17 — D1 D17 — EIM_D18 — D2 D18 — EIM_D19 — D3 D19 — EIM_D20 — D4 D20 — EIM_D21 — D5 D21 — i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 51 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 51. WEIM Internal Module Multiplexing (continued) Package Signal Name EIM 16-Bit MUXed Data/Address EIM 16-Bit Non-MUXed Data/Address EIM 32-Bit MUXed Data/Address EIM MUXed to NAND Flash DATA EIM_D22 — D6 D22 — EIM_D23 — D7 D23 — EIM_D24 — D8 D24 — EIM_D25 — D9 D25 — EIM_D26 — D10 D26 — EIM_D27 — D11 D27 — EIM_D28 — D12 D28 — EIM_D29 — D13 D29 — EIM_D30 — D14 D30 — EIM_D31 — D15 D31 — EIM_A16 A16 A16 A16 A16 EIM_A17 A17 A17 A17 A17 EIM_A18 A18 A18 A18 A18 EIM_A19 A19 A19 A19 A19 EIM_A20 A20 A20 A20 A20 EIM_A21 A21 A21 A21 A21 EIM_A22 A22 A22 A22 A22 EIM_A23 A23 A23 A23 A23 EIM_A24 A24 A24 A24 A24 EIM_A25 A25 A25 A25 A25 EIM_A26 A26 A26 A26 A26 EIM_A27 A27 A27 A27 A27 EIM_EB0 EB0 EB0 EB0 EB0 EIM_EB1 EB1 EB1 EB1 EB1 EIM_EB2 EB2 EB2 EB2 EB2 EIM_EB3 EB3 EB3 EB3 EB3 EIM_OE OE OE OE OE EIM_CS0 CS0 CS0 CS0 CS0 EIM_CS1 CS1 CS1 CS1 CS1 EIM_CS2 CS2 CS2 CS2 CS2 EIM_CS3 CS3 CS3 CS3 CS3 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 52 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 51. WEIM Internal Module Multiplexing (continued) Package Signal Name EIM 16-Bit MUXed Data/Address EIM 16-Bit Non-MUXed Data/Address EIM 32-Bit MUXed Data/Address EIM MUXed to NAND Flash DATA EIM_CS4 CS4 CS4 CS4 CS4 EIM_CS5 CS5 CS5 CS5 CS5 EIM_DTACK DTACK DTACK DTACK DTACK EIM_WAIT WAIT WAIT WAIT WAIT EIM_LBA LBA LBA LBA LBA EIM_BCLK BCLK BCLK BCLK BCLK EIM_RW RW RW RW RW EIM_CRE CRE CRE CRE CRE EIM_SDBA1 SDBA1 SDBA1 SDBA1 SDBA1 EIM_SDBA0 SDBA0 SDBA0 SDBA0 SDBA0 4.6.7.3 General WEIM Timing The following diagrams and tables specify the timings related to the WEIM module. All WEIM output control signals may be asserted and deasserted by an internal clock synchronized to the BCLK rising edge according to corresponding assertion/negation control fields. , WE1 WE2 WE3 ... BCLK WE4 WE5 Address WE6 WE7 CSx_B WE8 WE9 WE_B WE10 WE11 OE_B WE12 WE13 BEy_B WE14 WE15 ADV_B WE16 WE17 Output Data Figure 20. WEIM Outputs Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 53 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics BCLK WE18 Input Data WE19 WE20 WAIT_B WE21 Figure 21. WEIM Inputs Timing Diagram Table 52. WEIM Bus Timing Parameters 1 BCD = 0 ID BCD = 1 BCD = 2 BCD = 3 Parameter Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max t — 2t — 3t — 4t — WE1 BCLK Cycle time2 WE2 BCLK Low Level Width 0.4t — 0.8t — 1.2t — 1.6t — WE3 BCLK High Level Width 0.4t — 0.8t — 1.2t — 1.6t — WE4 Clock rise to address valid3 -0.5t-1.25 -0.5t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 WE5 Clock rise to address invalid 0.5t-1.25 t-1.25 t+1.75 2t-1.25 2t+1.75 3t-1.25 3t+1.75 WE6 Clock rise to CSx_B valid -0.5t-1.25 -0.5t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 WE7 Clock rise to CSx_B invalid 0.5t-1.25 0.5t+1.75 2t-1.25 2t+1.75 2t-1.25 2t+1.75 3t-1.25 3t+1.75 WE8 Clock rise to WE_B Valid -0.5t-1.25 -0.5t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 WE9 Clock rise to WE_B Invalid 0.5t-1.25 0.5t+1.75 2t-1.25 2t+1.75 2t-1.25 2t+1.75 3t-1.25 3t+1.75 WE10 Clock rise to OE_B Valid -0.5t-1.25 -0.5t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 WE11 Clock rise to OE_B Invalid 0.5t-1.25 0.5t+1.75 2t-1.25 2t+1.75 2t-1.25 2t+1.75 3t-1.25 3t+1.75 WE12 Clock rise to BEy_B Valid -0.5t-1.25 -0.5t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 WE13 Clock rise to BEy_B Invalid 0.5t-1.25 0.5t+1.75 t-1.25 t+1.75 2t-1.25 2t+1.75 3t-1.25 3t+1.75 WE14 Clock rise to ADV_B Valid -0.5t-1.25 -0.5t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 WE15 Clock rise to ADV_B Invalid 0.5t-1.25 0.5t+1.75 t-1.25 t+1.75 2t-1.25 2t+1.75 3t-1.25 3t+1.75 WE164 Clock rise to Output Data Valid -0.5t-1.25 -0.5t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 -t-1.25 -t+1.75 WE174 Clock rise to Output Data Invalid 0.5t-1.25 0.5t+1.75 t-1.25 t+1.75 2t-1.25 2t+1.75 3t-1.25 3t+1.75 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 54 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 52. WEIM Bus Timing Parameters (continued)1 BCD = 0 ID BCD = 1 BCD = 2 BCD = 3 Parameter Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max WE184 Input Data setup time to Clock rise 2 — 4 — — — — — WE194 Input Data hold time from Clock rise 2 — 2 — — — — — WE20 WAIT_B setup time to Clock rise 2 — 4 — — — — — WE21 WAIT_B hold time from Clock rise 2 — 2 — — — — — 1 t is axi_clk cycle time. The maximum allowed axi_clk frequency is 133 MHz, whereas the maximum allowed BCLK frequency is 104 MHz. As a result if BCD = 0, axi_clk must be ≤104 MHz. If BCD = 1, then 133 MHz is allowed for axi_clk, resulting in a BCLK of 66.5 MHz. When the clock branch to WEIM is decreased to 104 MHz, other busses are impacted which are clocked from this source. See the CCM chapter of the i.MX51 Reference Manual for a detailed clock tree description. 2 BCLK parameters are being measured from the 50% point. i.e., high is defined as 50% of signal value and low is defined as 50% as signal value. 3 For signal measurements “High” is defined as 80% of signal value and “Low” is defined as 20% of signal value. 4 The lower 16 bits of the WEIM bus are limited to 90 MHz.” 4.6.7.4 Examples of WEIM Accesses The following diagrams give few examples of basic WEIM accesses to external memory devices with the timing parameters mentioned previously for specific control parameters settings. BCLK WE4 ADDR Last Valid Address WE6 WE5 Next Address Address v1 WE7 CSx_B WE_B WE14 WE15 WE10 WE11 WE12 WE13 ADV_B OE_B BEy_B WE18 DATA D(v1) WE19 Figure 22. Synchronous Memory Read Access, WSC=1 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 55 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics BCLK WE5 WE4 ADDR Last Valid Address Next Address Address V1 WE6 WE7 WE8 WE9 CSx_B WE_B WE14 ADV_B WE15 OE_B WE13 WE12 BEy_B WE17 WE16 DATA D(V1) Figure 23. Synchronous Memory, Write Access, WSC=1, WBEA=1, WBEN=1, and WADVN=0 BCLK ADDR WE5 WE4 Last Valid Addr Address V1 Address V2 WE6 WE7 CSx_B WE_B WE15 WE14 WE14 WE15 ADV_B WE10 WE11 WE12 WE13 OE_B BEy_B WE21 WAIT_B WE20 WE19 D(V1) D(V1+1) Halfword Halfword DATA D(V2) D(V2+1) HalfwordHalfword WE18 Figure 24. Synchronous 16-Bit Memory, Two Non-Sequential 32-bit Read Accesses, WSC=2, SRD=1, BCD=0 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 56 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics BCLK WE4 ADDR WE5 Last Valid Addr Address V1 WE6 WE7 WE8 WE9 CSx_B WE_B WE14 WE15 ADV_B OE_B WE12 WE13 BEy_B WE21 WAIT_B WE20 WE17 WE17 DATA D(V2) D(V3) D(V4) D(V1) WE16 WE16 Figure 25. Synchronous Memory, Burst Write, BCS=1, WSC=4, SRD=1, and BCD=0 BCLK WE5 WE4 ADDR/ M_DATA LastValid Addr WE6 WE17 WE16 Write Data Address V1 WE7 CSx_B WE8 WE_B WE14 WE9 WE15 ADV_B OE_B WE10 WE11 BEy_B Figure 26. Muxed Address/Data (A/D) Mode, Synchronous Write Access, WSC=6, ADVA=1, ADVN=1, and ADH=1 NOTE In 32-bit muxed address/data (A/D) mode the16 MSBs are driven on the data bus. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 57 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics BCLK WE4 ADDR/ M_DATA WE19 WE5 Last Valid Addr WE6 Address V1 Data WE18 CSx_B WE7 WE_B WE15 WE14 ADV_B WE10 WE11 OE_B WE12 WE13 BEy_B Figure 27. 16-Bit Muxed A/D Mode, Synchronous Read Access, WSC=7, RADVN=1, ADH=1, OEA=2 The Figure 28, Figure 29, Figure 30, and Table 53 help to determine timing parameters relative chip select (CS) state for asynchronous and DTACK WEIM accesses with corresponding WEIM bit fields and the timing parameters mentioned above. CSx_B WE31 ADDR Last Valid Address WE32 Next Address Address V1 WE_B WE39 WE40 WE35 WE36 WE37 WE38 ADV_B OE_B BEy_B WE44 DATA D(V1) WE43 Figure 28. Asynchronous Memory Read Access i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 58 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics CSx_B WE31 ADDR WE32 Last Valid Address WE33 Next Address Address V1 WE34 WE_B WE39 WE40 WE45 WE46 ADV_B OE_B BEy_B WE42 DATA D(V1) WE41 Figure 29. Asynchronous Memory Write Access CSx_B WE31 ADDR WE32 Last Valid Address Next Address Address V1 WE_B WE39 WE40 WE35 WE36 WE37 WE38 ADV_B OE_B BEy_B WE44 DATA D(V1) WE43 WE48 DATA WE47 Figure 30. DTACK Read Access Table 53. WEIM Asynchronous Timing Parameters Table Relative Chip Select ID Parameter WE31 CSx_B valid to Address Valid Determination by Synchronous Measured Parameters 1 Min Max Unit WE4 – WE6 – CSA2 — 3 – CSA ns WE32 Address Invalid to CSx_B invalid WE7 – WE5 – CSN 3 — 3 – CSN ns WE33 CSx_B Valid to WE_B Valid WE8 – WE6 + (WEA – CSA) — 3 + (WEA – CSA) ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 59 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 53. WEIM Asynchronous Timing Parameters Table Relative Chip Select (continued) ID Determination by Synchronous Measured Parameters 1 Parameter Min Max Unit WE34 WE_B Invalid to CSx_B Invalid WE7 – WE9 + (WEN – CSN) — 3 – (WEN_CSN) ns WE35 CSx_B Valid to OE_B Valid WE10 – WE6 + (OEA – CSA) — 3 + (OEA – CSA) ns WE36 OE_B Invalid to CSx_B Invalid WE7 – WE11 + (OEN – CSN) — 3 – (OEN – CSN) ns WE37 CSx_B Valid to BEy_B Valid (Read access) WE12 – WE6 + (RBEA – CSA) — 3 + (RBEA4 – CSA) ns WE38 BEy_B Invalid to CSx_B Invalid WE7 – WE13 + (RBEN – CSN) (Read access) — 3 – (RBEN5 – CSN) ns WE39 CSx_B Valid to ADV_B Valid — 3 + (ADVA – CSA) ns WE40 ADV_B Invalid to CSx_B Invalid WE7 – WE15 – CSN (ADVL is asserted) — 3 – CSN ns WE41 CSx_B Valid to Output Data Valid WE16 – WE6 – WCSA — 3 – WCSA ns WE42 Output Data Invalid to CSx_B Invalid WE17 – WE7 – CSN — 3 – CSN ns WE43 Input Data Valid to CSx_B Invalid MAXCO + MAXDI MAXCO6 + MAXDI7 — ns WE44 CSx_B Invalid to Input Data invalid 0 0 — ns WE45 CSx_B Valid to BEy_B Valid (Write access) WE12 – WE6 + (WBEA – CSA) — 3 + (WBEA – CSA) ns WE46 BEy_B Invalid to CSx_B Invalid WE7 – WE13 + (WBEN – CSN) (Write access) — –3 + (WBEN – CSN) ns MAXCO 6 + MAXDTI 8 — ns 0 — ns WE14 – WE6 + (ADV – CSA) WE47 Dtack Valid to CSx_B Invalid MAXCO + MAXDTI WE48 CSx_B Invalid to Dtack invalid 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Parameters WE4... WE21 value see in the Table 53. CS Assertion. This bit field determines when CS signal is asserted during read/write cycles. CS Negation. This bit field determines when CS signal is negated during read/write cycles. BE Assertion. This bit field determines when BE signal is asserted during read cycles. BE Negation. This bit field determines when BE signal is negated during read cycles. Output maximum delay from internal driving the FFs to chip outputs. The Max. delay between all memory controls (addr, csx_b, oe_b, we_b, bey_b, and adv_b) Maximum delay from chip input data to internal FFs. The max. delay between all data input pins. DTACK maximum delay from chip input data to internal FF. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 60 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.6.8 SDRAM Controller Timing Parameters 4.6.8.1 Mobile DDR SDRAM Timing Parameters DD1 SDCLK SDCLK DD2 DD4 DD3 CS DD5 RAS DD5 DD4 CAS DD4 DD5 DD5 WE DD6 ADDR DD7 ROW/BA COL/BA Figure 31. Mobile DDR SDRAM Basic Timing Parameters Table 54. Mobile DDR SDRAM Timing Parameter Table 200 MHz ID 1 Parameter 166 MHz 133 MHz Symbol Unit Min Max Min Max Min Max DD1 SDRAM clock high-level width tCH 0.45 0.55 0.45 0.55 0.45 0.55 tCK DD2 SDRAM clock low-level width tCL 0.45 0.55 0.45 0.55 0.45 0.55 tCK DD3 SDRAM clock cycle time tCK 5 — 6 — 7.5 — ns DD4 CS, RAS, CAS, CKE, WE setup time tIS1 0.9 — 1.1 — 1.3 — ns DD5 CS, RAS, CAS, CKE, WE hold time tIH1 0.9 — 1.1 — 1.3 — ns DD6 Address output setup time tIS1 0.9 — 1.1 — 1.3 — ns DD7 Address output hold time tIH1 0.9 — 1.1 — 1.3 — ns This parameter is affected by pad timing. if the slew rate is < 1 V/ns, 0.2 ns should be added to the value. For cmos65 pads this is true for medium and low drive strengths. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 61 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics SDCLK SDCLK_B DD19 DD22 DD21 DQS (output) DD18 DD17 DQ (output) DD20 DD23 DD17 DD18 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data DM DM DM DM DM DM DM DM DQM (output) DD17 DD18 DD17 DD18 Figure 32. Mobile DDR SDRAM Write cycle Timing Diagram Table 55. Mobile DDR SDRAM Write Cycle Parameter Table1 200 MHz2 ID Parameter 166 MHz 133 MHz Unit Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max DD17 DQ and DQM setup time to DQS tDS3 0.48 — 0.6 — 0.8 — ns DD18 DQ and DQM hold time to DQS tDH1 0.48 — 0.6 — 0.8 — ns DD19 Write cycle DQS falling edge to SDCLK output setup time tDSS 0.2 — 0.2 — 0.2 — tCK DD20 Write cycle DQS falling edge to SDCLK output hold time tDSH 0.2 — 0.2 — 0.2 — tCK DD21 Write command to first DQS latching transition tDQSS 0.75 1.25 0.75 1.25 0.75 1.25 tCK DD22 DQS high level width tDQSH 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 tCK DD23 DQS low level width tDQSL 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 tCK 1 Test conditions are: Capacitance 15 pF for DDR PADS. Recommended drive strengths is medium for SDCLK and high for address and controls 2 SDRAM CLK and DQS related parameters are being measured from the 50% point. that is, high is defined as 50% of signal value and low is defined as 50% as signal value. DDR SDRAM CLK parameters are measured at the crossing point of SDCLK and SDCLK (inverted clock). 3 This parameter is affected by pad timing. If the slew rate is < 1 V/ns, 0.1 ns should be increased to this value. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 62 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics SDCLK SDCLK_B DD26 DQS (input) DD25 DD24 Data DQ (input) Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Figure 33. Mobile DDR SDRAM DQ vs. DQS and SDCLK READ Cycle Timing Diagram Table 56. Mobile DDR SDRAM Read Cycle Parameter Table1 200 MHz2 ID PARAMETER 166 MHz 133 MHz Unit Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max DD24 DQS - DQ Skew (defines the Data valid window in read cycles related to DQS) DD25 DQS DQ in HOLD time from DQS DD26 DQS output access time from SDCLK posedge tDQSQ — 0.4 — 0.75 — 0.85 ns tQH 1.75 — 2.05 — 2.6 — ns tDQSCK 2 5 2 5.5 2 6.5 ns 1 Test conditions are: Capacitance 15 pF for DDR PADS. Recommended drive strengths is medium for SDCLK and high for address and controls 2 SDRAM CLK and DQS related parameters are being measured from the 50% point. that is, high is defined as 50% of signal value and low is defined as 50% as signal value. DDR SDRAM CLK parameters are measured at the crossing point of SDCLK and SDCLK (inverted clock) i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 63 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.6.9 DDR2 SDRAM Specific Parameters Figure 34 shows the timing parameters for DDR2. The timing parameters for this diagram appear in Table 57. DDR1 SDCLK SDCLK DDR2 DDR4 DDR3 CS DDR5 RAS DDR5 DDR4 CAS DDR4 DDR5 DDR5 WE ODT/CKE DDR4 DDR6 DDR7 ADDR ROW/BA COL/BA Figure 34. DDR2 SDRAM Basic Timing Parameters Table 57. DDR2 SDRAM Timing Parameter Table SDCLK = 200 MHz ID Parameter Symbol Unit Min Max DDR1 SDRAM clock high-level width tCH 0.45 0.55 tCK DDR2 SDRAM clock low-level width tCL 0.45 0.55 tCK DDR3 SDRAM clock cycle time tCK 5 — ns DDR4 CS, RAS, CAS, CKE, WE, ODT setup time tIS1 0.35 — ns DDR5 CS, RAS, CAS, CKE, WE, ODT hold time tIH1 0.475 — ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 64 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 57. DDR2 SDRAM Timing Parameter Table (continued) SDCLK = 200 MHz ID 1 Parameter Symbol Unit Min Max DDR6 Address output setup time tIS1 0.35 — ns DDR7 Address output hold time tIH1 0.475 — ns These values are for command/address slew rates of 1V/ns and SDCLK / SDCLK_B differential slew rate of 2 V/ns. For different values use the settings shown in Table 58. Table 58. Derating Values for DDR2-400 (SDCLK = 200 MHz) Command / Address Slew Rate (V/ns) SDCLK Differential Slew Rates1,2 2.0 V/ns 1.5 V/ns 1.0 V/ns Unit ΔtlS ΔtlH ΔtlS ΔtlH ΔtlS ΔtlH 4.0 +187 +94 +217 +124 +247 +154 ps 3.5 +179 +89 +209 +119 +239 +149 ps 3.0 +167 +83 +197 +113 +227 +143 ps 2.5 +150 +75 +180 +105 +210 +135 ps 2.0 +125 +45 +155 +75 +185 +105 ps 1.5 +83 +21 +113 +51 +143 +81 ps 1.0 +0 +0 +30 +30 +60 +60 ps 0.9 –11 –14 +19 +16 +49 +46 ps 0.8 –25 –31 +5 –1 +35 +29 ps 0.7 –43 –54 –13 –24 +17 +6 ps 0.6 –67 –83 –37 –53 –7 –23 ps 0.5 –110 –125 –80 –95 –50 –65 ps 0.4 –175 –188 –145 –158 –115 –128 ps 0.3 –285 –292 –255 –262 –225 –232 ps 0.25 –350 –375 –320 –345 –290 –315 ps 0.2 –525 –500 –495 –470 –465 –440 ps 0.15 –800 –708 –770 –678 –740 –648 ps 0.1 –1450 –1125 –1420 –1095 –1390 –1065 ps 1 Test conditions are: Capacitance 15 pF for DDR contacts. Recommended drive strengths: Medium for SDCLK and High for address and controls. 2 SDCLK and DQS related parameters are measured from the 50% point. For example, a high is defined as 50% of the signal value and a low is defined as 50% of the signal value. DDR SDRAM CLK parameters are measured at the crossing point of SDCLK and SDCLK_B i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 65 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics SDCLK SDCLK_B DDR21 DDR19 DDR22 DDR20 DDR23 DQS (output) DDR18 DDR17 DQ (output) DQM (output) DDR17 DDR17 DDR18 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data DM DM DM DM DM DM DM DM DDR18 DDR17 DDR18 Figure 35. DDR2 SDRAM Write Cycle Table 59. DDR2 SDRAM Write Cycle SDCLK = 200 MHz ID DDR17 PARAMETER Symbol DQ and DQM setup time to DQS (differential strobe)1 1 DDR18 DQ and DQM hold time to DQS (differential strobe) DDR17 DQ and DQM setup time to DQS (single-ended strobe)2 2 Unit Min Max tDS(base) 0.15 — ns tDH(base) 0.275 — ns tDS1(base) 0.025 — ns tDH1(base) 0.025 — ns DDR18 DQ and DQM hold time to DQS (single-ended strobe) DDR19 Write cycle DQS falling edge to SDCLK output setup time tDSS 0.2 — tCK DDR20 Write cycle DQS falling edge to SDCLK output hold time tDSH 0.2 — tCK DDR21 DQS latching rising transitions to associated clock edges tDQSS –0.25 0.25 tCK DDR22 DQS high level width tDQSH 0.35 — tCK DDR23 DQS low level width tDQSL 0.35 — tCK 1 These values are for DQ/DM slew rates of 1 V/ns and DQS/DQS_B differential slew rates of 2 V/ns. For different values use derating table below 2 These values are for DQ/DM slew rates of 1 V/ns and DQS slew rates of 1 V/ns. For different values use derating table below i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 66 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 60. Derating values for DDR2 Differential DQS 1,2 Table 61. Derating values for DDR2 Single Ended DQS3,4 1. Test conditions are: Capacitance 15 pF for DDR PADS. Recommended drive strengths is medium for SDCLK and high for address and controls. 2. SDRAM CLK and DQS related parameters are being measured from the 50% point. that is, high is defined as 50% of signal value and low is defined as 50% as signal value. DDR SDRAM CLK parameters are measured at the crossing point of SDCLK and SDCLK (inverted clock). 3. Test conditions are: Capacitance 15 pF for DDR PADS. Recommended drive strengths is medium for SDCLK and high for address and controls. 4. SDRAM CLK and DQS related parameters are being measured from the 50% point. that is, high is defined as 50% of signal value and low is defined as 50% as signal value. DDR SDRAM CLK parameters are measured at the crossing point of SDCLK and SDCLK (inverted clock). i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 67 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics SDCLK SDCLK_B DDR26 DQS (input) DDR25 DDR24 DQ (input) DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA Figure 36. DDR2 SDRAM DQ vs. DQS and SDCLK READ Cycle Table 62. DDR2 SDRAM Read Cycle1 SDCLK = 200 MHz2 ID Parameter DDR24 DQS - DQ Skew (defines the Data valid window in read cycles related to DQS). DDR25 DQS DQ in HOLD time from DQS DDR26 DQS output access time from SDCLK posedge Symbol Unit Min Max tDQSQ — 0.35 ns tQH 1.8 — ns tDQSCK –0.5 0.5 ns 1 Test conditions are: Capacitance of 15 pF for DDR contacts. The recommended drive strength is Medium for SDCLK and High for address and controls 2 SDCLK and DQS related parameters are being measured from the 50% point. that is, high is defined as 50% of signal value and low is defined as 50% as signal value. DDR SDRAM CLK parameters are measured at the crossing point of SDCLK and SDCLK_B. 4.7 4.7.1 External Peripheral Interfaces CSPI Timing Parameters This section describes the timing parameters of the CSPI. The CSPI has separate timing parameters for master and slave modes. The nomenclature used with the CSPI modules and the respective routing of these signals is shown in Table 63 on page 69. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 68 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 63. CSPI Nomenclature and Routing Module eCSPI1 CSPI11, USBH1, and DI1 via IOMUX eCSPI2 NANDF and USBH1 via IOMUX CSPI NANDF, USBH1, SD1, SD2, and GPIO via IOMUX 1 4.7.1.1 I/O Access This set of BGA contacts is labeled CSPI, but is actually an eCSPI channel CSPI Master Mode Timing Figure 37 depicts the timing of CSPI in Master mode and Table 64 lists the CSPI Master Mode timing characteristics. RDY CS10 SSx CS1 CS5 CS6 CS2 CS3 CS4 SCLK CS7 CS2 CS3 MOSI CS9 CS8 MISO Figure 37. CSPI Master Mode Timing Diagram Table 64. CSPI Master Mode Timing Parameters ID Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit CS1 SCLK Cycle Time tclk 60 — ns CS2 SCLK High or Low Time tSW 26 — ns CS3 SCLK Rise or Fall1 tRISE/FALL — — ns CS4 SSx pulse width tCSLH 26 — ns CS5 SSx Lead Time (Slave Select setup time) tSCS 26 — ns CS6 SSx Lag Time (SS hold time) tHCS 26 — ns CS7 MOSI Propagation Delay (CLOAD = 20 pF) tPDmosi –1 21 ns CS8 MISO Setup Time tSmiso 5 — ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 69 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 64. CSPI Master Mode Timing Parameters (continued) ID Parameter CS9 MISO Hold Time CS10 1 2 4.7.1.2 RDY to SSx Time2 Symbol Min Max Unit tHmiso 5 — ns tSDRY 5 — ns See specific I/O AC parameters Section 4.5, “I/O AC Parameters” SPI_RDY is sampled internally by ipg_clk and is asynchronous to all other CSPI signals. CSPI Slave Mode Timing Figure 38 depicts the timing of CSPI in Slave mode. Table 65 lists the CSPI Slave Mode timing characteristics. SSx CS2 CS1 CS5 CS6 CS4 SCLK CS2 CS9 MISO CS7 CS8 MOSI Figure 38. CSPI Slave Mode Timing Diagram Table 65. CSPI Slave Mode Timing Parameters ID Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit CS1 SCLK Cycle Time tclk 60 — ns CS2 SCLK High or Low Time tSW 26 — ns CS4 SSx pulse width tCSLH 26 — ns CS5 SSx Lead Time (SS setup time) tSCS 26 — ns CS6 SSx Lag Time (SS hold time) tHCS 26 — ns CS7 MOSI Setup Time tSmosi 5 — ns CS8 MOSI Hold Time tHmosi 5 — ns CS9 MISO Propagation Delay (CLOAD = 20 pF) tPDmiso 0 35 ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 70 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.2 eCSPI Timing Parameters This section describes the timing parameters of the eCSPI. The eCSPI has separate timing parameters for master and slave modes. The nomenclature used with the CSPI modules and the respective routing of these signals is shown in Table 63 on page 69. 4.7.2.1 eCSPI Master Mode Timing Figure 37 depicts the timing of eCSPI in Master mode and Table 64 lists the eCSPI Master Mode timing characteristics. eCSPIx_DRYN1 CS11 eCSPIx_CS_x CS1 CS2 CS3 CS5 CS6 CS4 eCSPIx_CLK CS7 CS8 CS3 CS2 eCSPIx_DO CS9 CS10 eCSPIx_DI Figure 39. eCSPI Master Mode Timing Diagram Table 66. eCSPI Master Mode Timing Parameters ID Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit CS1 eCSPIx_CLK Cycle Time–Read eCSPIx_CLK Cycle Time–Write tclk 60 15 — ns CS2 eCSPIx_CLK High or Low Time tSW 6 — ns CS3 eCSPIx_CLK Rise or Fall tRISE/FALL — — ns CS4 eCSPIx_CS_x pulse width tCSLH 15 — ns CS5 eCSPIx_CS_x Lead Time (CS setup time) tSCS 5 — ns CS6 eCSPIx_CS_x Lag Time (CS hold time) tHCS 5 — ns CS7 eCSPIx_DO Setup Time tSmosi 5 — ns CS8 eCSPIx_DO Hold Time tHmosi 5 — ns CS9 eCSPIx_DI Setup Time tSmiso 5 — ns CS10 eCSPIx_DI Hold Time tHmiso 5 — ns CS11 eCSPIx_DRYN Setup Time tSDRY 5 — ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 71 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.2.2 eCSPI Slave Mode Timing Figure 39 depicts the timing of eCSPI in Slave mode and Table 66 lists the eCSPI Slave Mode timing characteristics. eCSPIx_CS_x CS1 CS2 CS3 CS6 CS5 CS4 eCSPIx_CLK CS9CS10 CS2 CS3 eCSPIx_DI CS7 CS8 eCSPIx_DO Figure 40. eCSPI Slave Mode Timing Diagram Table 67. eCSPI Slave Mode Timing Parameters ID Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit CS1 eCSPIx_CLK Cycle Time–Read eCSPIx_CLK Cycle Time–Write tclk 60 15 — ns CS2 eCSPIx_CLK High or Low Time tSW 6 — ns CS3 eCSPIx_CLK Rise or Fall tRISE/FALL — — ns CS4 eCSPIx_CS_x pulse width tCSLH 15 — ns CS5 eCSPIx_CS_x Lead Time (CS setup time) tSCS 5 — ns CS6 eCSPIx_CS_x Lag Time (CS hold time) tHCS 5 — ns CS7 eCSPIx_DO Setup Time tSmosi 5 — ns CS8 eCSPIx_DO Hold Time tHmosi 5 — ns CS9 eCSPIx_DI Setup Time tSmiso 5 — ns CS10 eCSPIx_DI Hold Time tHmiso 5 — ns 4.7.3 eSDHCv2 Timing Parameters This section describes the electrical information of the eSDHCv2. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 72 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Figure 41 depicts the timing of eSDHCv2, and Table 68 lists the eSDHCv2 timing characteristics. SD4 SD2 SD1 SD5 MMCx_CLK SD3 MMCx_CMD MMCx_DAT_0 MMCx_DAT_1 output from eSDHCv2 to card ...... MMCx_DAT_7 SD6 SD7 SD8 MMCx_CMD MMCx_DAT_0 MMCx_DAT_1 input from card to eSDHCv2 ...... MMCx_DAT_3 Figure 41. eSDHCv2 Timing Table 68. eSDHCv2 Interface Timing Specification ID Parameter Symbols Min Max Unit Clock Frequency (Low Speed) fPP1 0 400 kHz Clock Frequency (SD/SDIO Full Speed/High Speed) fPP2 0 25/50 MHz Clock Frequency (MMC Full Speed/High Speed) fPP3 0 20/52 MHz Clock Frequency (Identification Mode) fOD 100 400 kHz SD2 Clock Low Time tWL 7 — ns SD3 Clock High Time tWH 7 — ns SD4 Clock Rise Time tTLH — 3 ns SD5 Clock Fall Time tTHL — 3 ns 3 ns Card Input Clock SD1 eSDHC Output / Card Inputs CMD, DAT (Reference to CLK) SD64 eSDHC Output Delay tOD –3 eSDHC Input / Card Outputs CMD, DAT (Reference to CLK) i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 73 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 68. eSDHCv2 Interface Timing Specification (continued) ID SD7 SD8 Parameter Symbols Min Max Unit tISU 2.5 — ns 5 2.5 — ns eSDHC Input Setup Time eSDHC Input Hold Time tIH 1 In low speed mode, card clock must be lower than 400 kHz, voltage ranges from 2.7 to 3.6 V. In normal speed mode for SD/SDIO card, clock frequency can be any value between 0–25 MHz. In high-speed mode, clock frequency can be any value between 0 –50 MHz. 3 In normal speed mode for MMC card, clock frequency can be any value between 0–20 MHz. In high-speed mode, clock frequency can be any value between 0 –52 MHz. 4 Measurement taken with CLoad = 20 pF 5 To satisfy hold timing, the delay difference between clock input and cmd/data input must not exceed 2 ns. 2 4.7.4 FEC AC Timing Parameters This section describes the electrical information of the Fast Ethernet Controller (FEC) module. The FEC is designed to support both 10 and 100 Mbps Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 networks. An external transceiver interface and transceiver function are required to complete the interface to the media. The FEC supports the 10/100 Mbps MII (18 pins in total) and the 10 Mbps-only 7-wire interface, which uses 7 of the MII pins, for connection to an external Ethernet transceiver. For the pin list of MII and 7-wire, refer to the i.MX51 Reference Manual. This section describes the AC timing specifications of the FEC. 4.7.4.1 MII Receive Signal Timing The MII receive signal timing involves the FEC_RXD[3:0], FEC_RX_DV, FEC_RX_ER, and FEC_RX_CLK signals. The receiver functions correctly up to a FEC_RX_CLK maximum frequency of 25 MHz + 1%. There is no minimum frequency requirement but the processor clock frequency must exceed twice the FEC_RX_CLK frequency. Table 69 lists the MII receive channel signal timing parameters and Figure 42 shows MII receive signal timings. . 1 Table 69. MII Receive Signal Timing Num Characteristic1 Min Max Unit M1 FEC_RXD[3:0], FEC_RX_DV, FEC_RX_ER to FEC_RX_CLK setup 5 — ns M2 FEC_RX_CLK to FEC_RXD[3:0], FEC_RX_DV, FEC_RX_ER hold 5 — ns M3 FEC_RX_CLK pulse width high 35% 65% FEC_RX_CLK period M4 FEC_RX_CLK pulse width low 35% 65% FEC_RX_CLK period FEC_RX_DV, FEC_RX_CLK, and FEC_RXD0 have same timing in 10 Mbps 7-wire interface mode. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 74 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics M3 FEC_RX_CLK (input) M4 FEC_RXD[3:0] (inputs) FEC_RX_DV FEC_RX_ER M1 M2 Figure 42. MII Receive Signal Timing Diagram 4.7.4.2 MII Transmit Signal Timing The MII transmit signal timing affects the FEC_TXD[3:0], FEC_TX_EN, FEC_TX_ER, and FEC_TX_CLK signals. The transmitter functions correctly up to a FEC_TX_CLK maximum frequency of 25 MHz + 1%. There is no minimum frequency requirement. In addition, the processor clock frequency must exceed twice the FEC_TX_CLK frequency. Table 70 lists MII transmit channel timing parameters and Figure 43 shows MII transmit signal timing diagram for the values listed in Table 70. Table 70. MII Transmit Signal Timing Characteristic1 Num 1 Min Max Unit M5 FEC_TX_CLK to FEC_TXD[3:0], FEC_TX_EN, FEC_TX_ER invalid 5 — ns M6 FEC_TX_CLK to FEC_TXD[3:0], FEC_TX_EN, FEC_TX_ER valid — 20 ns M7 FEC_TX_CLK pulse width high 35% 65% FEC_TX_CLK period M8 FEC_TX_CLK pulse width low 35% 65% FEC_TX_CLK period FEC_TX_EN, FEC_TX_CLK, and FEC_TXD0 have the same timing in 10 Mbps 7-wire interface mode. . M7 FEC_TX_CLK (input) M5 M8 FEC_TXD[3:0] (outputs) FEC_TX_EN FEC_TX_ER M6 Figure 43. MII Transmit Signal Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 75 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.4.3 MII Async Inputs Signal Timing (FEC_CRS and FEC_COL) Table 71 lists MII asynchronous inputs signal timing information. Figure 44 shows MII asynchronous input timings listed in Table 71. Table 71. MII Async Inputs Signal Timing 1 Num Characteristic Min Max Unit M91 FEC_CRS to FEC_COL minimum pulse width 1.5 — FEC_TX_CLK period FEC_COL has the same timing in 10 Mbit 7-wire interface mode. . FEC_CRS, FEC_COL M9 Figure 44. MII Async Inputs Timing Diagram 4.7.4.4 MII Serial Management Channel Timing (FEC_MDIO and FEC_MDC) Table 72 lists MII serial management channel timings. Figure 45 shows MII serial management channel timings listed in Table 72. The MDC frequency should be equal to or less than 2.5 MHz to be compliant with the IEEE 802.3 MII specification. However the FEC can function correctly with a maximum MDC frequency of 15 MHz. Table 72. MII Transmit Signal Timing ID Characteristic Min Max Unit M10 FEC_MDC falling edge to FEC_MDIO output invalid (minimum propagation delay) 0 — ns M11 FEC_MDC falling edge to FEC_MDIO output valid (max propagation delay) — 5 ns M12 FEC_MDIO (input) to FEC_MDC rising edge setup 18 — ns M13 FEC_MDIO (input) to FEC_MDC rising edge hold 0 — ns M14 FEC_MDC pulse width high 40% 60% FEC_MDC period M15 FEC_MDC pulse width low 40% 60% FEC_MDC period i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 76 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics M14 M15 FEC_MDC (output) M10 FEC_MDIO (output) M11 FEC_MDIO (input) M12 M13 Figure 45. MII Serial Management Channel Timing Diagram 4.7.5 Frequency Pre-Multiplier (FPM) Electrical Parameters (CKIL) The FPM is a DPLL that converts a signal operating in the kilohertz region into a clock signal operating in the megahertz region. The output of the FPM provides the reference frequency for the on-chip DPLLs. Parameters of the FPM are listed in Table 73. Table 73. FPM Specifications Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Reference clock frequency range—CKIL 32 32.768 256 kHz FPM output clock frequency range 8 — 33 MHz 128 — 1024 — Lock-in time1 — — 312.5 µs Cycle-to-cycle frequency jitter (peak to peak) — 8 20 ns FPM multiplication factor (test condition is changed by a factor of 2) 1 plrf = 1 cycle assumed missed + x cycles for reset deassert + y cycles for calibration and lock x[ts] = {2,3,5,9}; y[ts] = {7,8,10,14}; where ts is the chosen time scale of the reference clock. In this case reference clock = 32 kHz which makes ts = 0, therefore total time required for achieving lock is 10(1+2+7) cycles or 312.5 µ s. 4.7.6 High-Speed I2C (HS-I2C) Timing Parameters This section describes the timing parameters of the HS-I2C module. This module can operate in the following modes: Standard, Fast and High speed. NOTE See the errata for C module in the i.MX51 Chip Errata. There are two standard I2C modules that have no errata. the HS-I2 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 77 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.6.1 Standard and Fast Mode Timing Parameters Figure 46 depicts the standard and fast mode timings of HS-I2C module, and Table 74 lists the timing characteristics. SCLH IC11 IC10 SDAH IC2 IC10 START IC7 IC4 IC8 IC9 IC11 IC6 IC3 STOP START START IC5 IC1 Figure 46. HS-I2C Standard and Fast Mode Bus Timing Table 74. HS-I 2C Timing Parameters—Standard and Fast Mode Standard Mode ID Fast Mode Parameter Unit Min Max Min Max IC1 SCLH cycle time 10 — 2.5 — µs IC2 Hold time (repeated) START condition 4.0 — 0.6 — µs IC3 Set-up time for STOP condition 4.0 — 0.6 — µs IC4 Data hold time 01 3.452 01 0.92 µs IC5 HIGH Period of SCLH Clock 4.0 — 0.6 — µs IC6 LOW Period of the SCLH Clock 4.7 — 1.3 — µs IC7 Set-up time for a repeated START condition 4.7 — 0.6 — µs IC8 Data set-up time 250 — 1003 — ns IC9 Bus free time between a STOP and START condition 4.7 — 1.3 — µs IC10 Rise time of both SDAH and SCLH signals — 1000 20+0.1C b4 300 ns 4 300 ns 100 pF IC11 Fall time of both SDAH and SCLH signals — 300 20+0.1C b IC12 Capacitive load for each bus line (Cb) — 100 — 1 A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for SDAH signal in order to bridge the undefined region of the falling edge of SCLH. 2 The maximum hold time has only to be met if the device does not stretch the LOW period (ID no IC6) of the SCLH signal 3 A Fast-mode I2C-bus device can be used in a Standard-mode I2C-bus system, but the requirement of Set-up time (ID No IC8) of 250 ns must then be met. This automatically is the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCLH signal. If such a device does stretch the LOW period of the SCLH signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDAH line max_rise_time (ID No IC10) + data_setup_time (ID No IC8) = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the Standard-mode I2C-bus specification) before the SCLH line is released. 4 C = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. b i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 78 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.6.2 High-Speed Mode Timing Parameters Figure 47 depicts the high-speed mode timings of HS-I2C module, and Table 75 lists the timing characteristics. SCLH IC12 IC11 SDAH IC3 IC9 START IC2 IC7 IC6 IC13 IC10 IC4 IC5 START STOP START IC8 IC1 Figure 47. High-Speed Mode Timing Table 75. HS-I2C High-Speed Mode Timing Parameters High-Speed Mode ID Parameter Unit Min Max IC1 SCLH cycle time 10 3.4 MHz IC2 Setup time (repeated) START condition 160 — ns IC3 Hold time (repeated) START condition 160 — ns IC4 LOW Period of the SCLH Clock 160 — ns IC5 HIGH Period of SCLH Clock 60 — ns IC6 Data set-up time 10 — ns IC7 Data hold time 01 70 ns IC8 Rise time of SCLH 10 40 ns IC9 Rise time of SCLH signal after a repeated START condition and after an acknowledge bit 10 80 ns IC10 Fall time of SCLH signal 10 40 ns IC11 Rise time of SDAH signal 10 80 ns IC12 Fall time of SDAH signal 10 80 ns 160 — ns — 100 pF IC13 Set-up time for STOP condition IC14 Capacitive load for each bus line (Cb) 1 A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for SDAH signal in order to bridge the undefined region of the falling edge of SCLH. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 79 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.7 I2C Module Timing Parameters This section describes the timing parameters of the I2C Module. Figure 48 depicts the timing of I2C module, and Table 76 lists the I2C Module timing characteristics. I2CLK IC11 IC10 I2DAT IC2 IC10 START IC7 IC4 IC8 IC11 IC6 IC9 IC3 STOP START START IC5 IC1 Figure 48. I2C Bus Timing Table 76. I2C Module Timing Parameters ID Parameter Fast Mode Standard Mode Supply Voltage = Supply Voltage = 2.7 V–3.3 V Unit 1.65 V–1.95 V, 2.7 V–3.3 V Min Max Min Max IC1 I2CLK cycle time 10 — 2.5 — µs IC2 Hold time (repeated) START condition 4.0 — 0.6 — µs IC3 Set-up time for STOP condition 4.0 — 0.6 — µs IC4 Data hold time 01 3.452 01 0.92 µs IC5 HIGH Period of I2CLK Clock 4.0 — 0.6 — µs IC6 LOW Period of the I2CLK Clock 4.7 — 1.3 — µs IC7 Set-up time for a repeated START condition 4.7 — 0.6 — µs IC8 Data set-up time 250 — 1003 — ns IC9 Bus free time between a STOP and START condition 4.7 — 1.3 — µs IC10 Rise time of both I2DAT and I2CLK signals — 1000 20 + 0.1Cb4 300 ns 4 300 ns 400 pF IC11 Fall time of both I2DAT and I2CLK signals — 300 20 + 0.1Cb IC12 Capacitive load for each bus line (C b) — 400 — 1 A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for I2DAT signal in order to bridge the undefined region of the falling edge of I2CLK. 2 The maximum hold time has only to be met if the device does not stretch the LOW period (ID no IC5) of the I2CLK signal 3 A Fast-mode I2C-bus device can be used in a Standard-mode I2C-bus system, but the requirement of Set-up time (ID No IC7) of 250 ns must be met. This automatically is the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the I2CLK signal. If such a device does stretch the LOW period of the I2CLK signal, it must output the next data bit to the I2DAT line max_rise_time (IC9) + data_setup_time (IC7) = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the Standard-mode I2C-bus specification) before the I2CLK line is released. 4 C = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. b i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 80 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.8 Image Processing Unit (IPU) Module Parameters The purpose of the IPU is to provide comprehensive support for the flow of data from an image sensor and/or to a display device. This support covers all aspects of these activities: • Connectivity to relevant devices—cameras, displays, graphics accelerators, and TV encoders. • Related image processing and manipulation: display processing, image conversions, and other related functions. • Synchronization and control capabilities such as avoidance of tearing artifacts. 4.7.8.1 Sensor Interface Timings There are three camera timing modes supported by the IPU. 4.7.8.1.1 BT.656 and BT.1120 Video Mode Smart camera sensors, which include imaging processing, usually support video mode transfer. They use an embedded timing syntax to replace the SENSB_VSYNC and SENSB_HSYNC signals. The timing syntax is defined by the BT.656/BT.1120 standards. This operation mode follows the recommendations of ITU BT.656/ ITU BT.1120 specifications. The only control signal used is SENSB_PIX_CLK. Start-of-frame and active-line signals are embedded in the data stream. An active line starts with a SAV code and ends with a EAV code. In some cases, digital blanking is inserted in between EAV and SAV code. The CSI decodes and filters out the timing-coding from the data stream, thus recovering SENSB_VSYNC and SENSB_HSYNC signals for internal use. On BT.656 one component per cycle is received over the SENSB_DATA bus. On BT.1120 two components per cycle are received over the SENSB_DATA bus. 4.7.8.1.2 Gated Clock Mode The SENSB_VSYNC, SENSB_HSYNC, and SENSB_PIX_CLK signals are used in this mode. See Figure 49. Active Line Start of Frame nth frame n+1th frame SENSB_VSYNC SENSB_HSYNC SENSB_PIX_CLK SENSB_DATA[19:0] invalid invalid 1st byte 1st byte Figure 49. Gated Clock Mode Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 81 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics A frame starts with a rising edge on SENSB_VSYNC (all the timings correspond to straight polarity of the corresponding signals). Then SENSB_HSYNC goes to high and hold for the entire line. Pixel clock is valid as long as SENSB_HSYNC is high. Data is latched at the rising edge of the valid pixel clocks. SENSB_HSYNC goes to low at the end of line. Pixel clocks then become invalid and the CSI stops receiving data from the stream. For next line the SENSB_HSYNC timing repeats. For next frame the SENSB_VSYNC timing repeats. 4.7.8.1.3 Non-Gated Clock Mode The timing is the same as the gated-clock mode (described in Section 4.7.8.1.2, “Gated Clock Mode”), except for the SENSB_HSYNC signal, which is not used. See Figure 50. All incoming pixel clocks are valid and cause data to be latched into the input FIFO. The SENSB_PIX_CLK signal is inactive (states low) until valid data is going to be transmitted over the bus. Start of Frame nth frame n+1th frame SENSB_VSYNC SENSB_PIX_CLK SENSB_DATA[19:0] invalid invalid 1st byte 1st byte Figure 50. Non-Gated Clock Mode Timing Diagram The timing described in Figure 50 is that of a typical sensor. Some other sensors may have a slightly different timing. The CSI can be programmed to support rising/falling-edge triggered SENSB_VSYNC; active-high/low SENSB_HSYNC; and rising/falling-edge triggered SENSB_PIX_CLK. 4.7.8.2 Electrical Characteristics Figure 51 depicts the sensor interface timing. SENSB_MCLK signal described here is not generated by the IPU. SENSB_PIX_CLK (Sensor Output) IP3 IP2 1/IP1 SENSB_DATA, SENSB_VSYNC, SENSB_HSYNC Figure 51. Sensor Interface Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 82 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 77. Sensor Interface Timing Characteristics ID Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit IP1 Sensor output (pixel) clock frequency Fpck 0.01 120 IP2 Data and control setup time Tsu 3 — ns IP3 Data and control holdup time Thd 2 — ns 4.7.8.3 MHz IPU Display Interface Signal Mapping The IPU supports a number of display output video formats. Table 78 defines the mapping of the Display Interface Pins used during various supported video interface formats. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 83 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 78. Video Signal Cross-Reference i.MX51A Port Name (x=1,2) LCD RGB/TV Signal Allocation (Example) RGB, Signal 16-bit 18-bit 24 Bit 8-bit Name 16-bit 20-bit (General) RGB RGB RGB YCrCb2 YCrCb YCrCb Comment1 Smart Signal Name DISPx_DAT0 DAT[0] B[0] B[0] B[0] Y/C[0] C[0] C[0] DAT[0] DISPx_DAT1 DAT[1] B[1] B[1] B[1] Y/C[1] C[1] C[1] DAT[1] DISPx_DAT2 DAT[2] B[2] B[2] B[2] Y/C[2] C[2] C[2] DAT[2] The restrictions are as follows: a) There are maximal three continuous groups of bits that could be independently mapped to the external bus. DISPx_DAT3 DAT[3] B[3] B[3] B[3] Y/C[3] C[3] C[3] DAT[3] Groups should not be overlapped. DISPx_DAT4 DAT[4] B[4] B[4] B[4] Y/C[4] C[4] C[4] DAT[4] DISPx_DAT5 DAT[5] G[0] B[5] B[5] Y/C[5] C[5] C[5] DAT[5] b) The bit order is expressed in each of the bit groups, for example B[0] = least significant blue pixel bit DISPx_DAT6 DAT[6] G[1] G[0] B[6] Y/C[6] C[6] C[6] DAT[6] DISPx_DAT7 DAT[7] G[2] G[1] B[7] Y/C[7] C[7] C[7] DAT[7] DISPx_DAT8 DAT[8] G[3] G[2] G[0] — Y[0] C[8] DAT[8] DISPx_DAT9 DAT[9] G[4] G[3] G[1] — Y[1] C[9] DAT[9] DISPx_DAT10 DAT[10] G[5] G[4] G[2] — Y[2] Y[0] DAT[10] DISPx_DAT11 DAT[11] R[0] G[5] G[3] — Y[3] Y[1] DAT[11] DISPx_DAT12 DAT[12] R[1] R[0] G[4] — Y[4] Y[2] DAT[12] DISPx_DAT13 DAT[13] R[2] R[1] G[5] — Y[5] Y[3] DAT[13] DISPx_DAT14 DAT[14] R[3] R[2] G[6] — Y[6] Y[4] DAT[14] DISPx_DAT15 DAT[15] R[4] R[3] G[7] — Y[7] Y[5] DAT[15] DISPx_DAT16 DAT[16] — R[4] R[0] — — Y[6] — DISPx_DAT17 DAT[17] — R[5] R[1] — — Y[7] — DISPx_DAT18 DAT[18] — — R[2] — — Y[8] — DISPx_DAT19 DAT[19] — — R[3] — — Y[9] — DISPx_DAT20 DAT[20] — — R[4] — — — — DISPx_DAT21 DAT[21] — — R[5] — — — — i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 84 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 78. Video Signal Cross-Reference (continued) i.MX51A Port Name (x=1,2) LCD RGB/TV Signal Allocation (Example) RGB, Signal 16-bit 18-bit 24 Bit 8-bit Name 16-bit 20-bit (General) RGB RGB RGB YCrCb2 YCrCb YCrCb Comment1 Smart Signal Name DISPx_DAT22 DAT[22] — — R[6] — — — — — DISPx_DAT23 DAT[23] — — R[7] — — — — — — — DIx_DISP_CLK PixCLK DIx_PIN1 — DIx_PIN2 HSYNC — — DIx_PIN3 VSYNC — VSYNC out DIx_PIN4 — — DIx_PIN5 — — Additional frame/row synchronous signals with programmable timing DIx_PIN6 — — DIx_PIN7 — — DIx_PIN8 — — DIx_D0_CS — CS0 — DIx_D1_CS — CS1 Alternate mode of PWM output for contrast or brightness control DIx_PIN11 — WR — DIx_PIN12 — RD — DIx_PIN13 — RS1 Register select signal DIx_PIN14 — RS2 Optional RS2 DIx_PIN15 DRDY/DV DRDY DIx_PIN16 — — DIx_PIN17 Q — 1 2 VSYNC_IN May be required for anti-tearing Data validation/blank, data enable Additional data synchronous signals with programmable features/timing Signal mapping (both data and control/synchronization) is flexible. The table provides examples. This mode works in compliance with recommendation ITU-R BT.656. The timing reference signals (frame start, frame end, line start, and line end) are embedded in the 8-bit data bus. Only video data is supported, transmission of non-video related data during blanking intervals is not supported. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 85 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.8.4 IPU Display Interface Timing The IPU Display Interface supports two kinds of display’s accesses: synchronous and asynchronous. There are two groups of external interface pins to provide synchronous and asynchronous controls accordantly. 4.7.8.4.1 Synchronous Controls The synchronous control is a signal that changes its value as a function either of a system or of an external clock. This control has a permanent period and a permanent wave form. There are special physical outputs to provide synchronous controls: • The ipp_disp_clk is a dedicated base synchronous signal that is used to generate a base display (component, pixel) clock for a display. • The ipp_pin_1– ipp_pin_7 are general purpose synchronous pins, that can be used to provide HSYNC, VSYNC, DRDY or any else independent signal to a display. The IPU has a system of internal binding counters for internal events (like HSYNC/VSYCN etc.) calculation. The internal event (local start point) is synchronized with internal DI_CLK. A suitable control starts from the local start point with predefined UP and DOWN values to calculate control’s changing points with half DI_CLK resolution. A full description of the counters system is in the IPU chapter of the i.MX51 reference manual. 4.7.8.4.2 Asynchronous Controls The asynchronous control is a data oriented signal that changes its a value with an output data according to an additional internal flags coming with the data. There are special physical outputs to provide asynchronous controls, as follows: • The ipp_d0_cs and ipp_d1_cspins are dedicated to provide chip select signals to two displays • The ipp_pin_11– ipp_pin_17 are general purpose asynchronous pins, that can be used to provide WR. RD, RS or any else data oriented signal to display. NOTE The IPU has independent signal generators for asynchronous signals toggling. When a DI decides to put a new asynchronous data in the bus, a new internal start (local start point) is generated. The signals generators calculate predefined UP and DOWN values to change pins states with half DI_CLK resolution. 4.7.8.5 4.7.8.5.1 Synchronous Interfaces to Standard Active Matrix TFT LCD Panels IPU Display Operating Signals The IPU uses four control signals and data to operate a standard synchronous interface: • IPP_DISP_CLK—Clock to display • HSYNC—Horizontal synchronization i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 86 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics • • VSYNC—Vertical synchronization DRDY—Active data All synchronous display controls are generated on base of an internal generated “local start point”. The synchronous display controls can be placed on time axis with DI’s offset, up and down parameters. The display access can be whole number of DI clock (Tdiclk) only. The IPP_DATA can not be moved relative to the local start point. 4.7.8.5.2 LCD Interface Functional Description Figure 52 depicts the LCD interface timing for a generic active matrix color TFT panel. In this figure signals are shown with negative polarity. The sequence of events for active matrix interface timing is: • DI_CLK internal DI clock, used for calculation of other controls. • IPP_DISP_CLK latches data into the panel on its negative edge (when positive polarity is selected). In active mode, IPP_DISP_CLK runs continuously. • HSYNC causes the panel to start a new line. (Usually IPP_PIN_2 is used as HSYNC) • VSYNC causes the panel to start a new frame. It always encompasses at least one HSYNC pulse. (Usually IPP_PIN_3 is used as VSYNC) • DRDY acts like an output enable signal to the CRT display. This output enables the data to be shifted onto the display. When disabled, the data is invalid and the trace is off. (For DRDY can be used either synchronous or asynchronous generic purpose pin as well.) VSYNC HSYNC LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 3 LINE 4 LINE n-1 LINE n HSYNC DRDY 1 2 3 m-1 m IPP_DISP_CLK IPP_DATA Figure 52. Interface Timing Diagram for TFT (Active Matrix) Panels i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 87 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.8.5.3 TFT Panel Sync Pulse Timing Diagrams Figure 53 depicts the horizontal timing (timing of one line), including both the horizontal sync pulse and the data. All shown on the figure parameters are programmable. All controls are started by corresponding internal events—local start points. The timing diagrams correspond to inverse polarity of the IPP_DISP_CLK signal and active-low polarity of the HSYNC, VSYNC and DRDY signals. IP13o IP7 IP5o IP8o IP5 IP8 DI clock IPP_DISP_CLK VSYNC HSYNC DRDY IPP_DATA D0 local start point local start point Dn IP9o IP9 local start point D1 IP10 IP6 Figure 53. TFT Panels Timing Diagram—Horizontal Sync Pulse Figure 54 depicts the vertical timing (timing of one frame). All parameters shown in the figure are programmable. Start of frame IP13 End of frame VSYNC HSYNC DRDY IP11 IP15 IP14 IP12 Figure 54. TFT Panels Timing Diagram—Vertical Sync Pulse i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 88 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 79 shows timing characteristics of signals presented in Figure 53 and Figure 54. Table 79. Synchronous Display Interface Timing Characteristics (Pixel Level) ID Parameter Symbol Value IP5 Display interface clock period Tdicp ( 1) IP6 Display pixel clock period Tdpcp IP7 Screen width time Tsw (SCREEN_WIDTH) × Tdicp IP8 HSYNC width time Thsw (HSYNC_WIDTH) IP9 Horizontal blank interval 1 Thbi1 IP10 Horizontal blank interval 2 Thbi2 IP12 Screen height IP13 Description Display interface clock. IPP_DISP_CLK DISP_CLK_PER_PIXEL Time of translation of one pixel to display, × Tdicp DISP_CLK_PER_PIXEL—number of pixel components in one pixel (1.n). The DISP_CLK_PER_PIXEL is virtual parameter to define Display pixel clock period. The DISP_CLK_PER_PIXEL is received by DC/DI one access division to n components. Unit ns ns SCREEN_WIDTH—screen width in, interface clocks. horizontal blanking included. The SCREEN_WIDTH should be built by suitable DI’s counter2. ns HSYNC_WIDTH—Hsync width in DI_CLK with 0.5 DI_CLK resolution. Defined by DI’s counter. ns BGXP—Width of a horizontal blanking before a first active data in a line. (in interface clocks). The BGXP should be built by suitable DI’s counter. ns (SCREEN_WIDTH BGXP - FW) × Tdicp Width a horizontal blanking after a last active data in a line. (in interface clocks) FW—with of active line in interface clocks. The FW should be built by suitable DI’s counter. ns Tsh (SCREEN_HEIGHT) × Tsw SCREEN_HEIGHT— screen height in lines with blanking The SCREEN_HEIGHT is a distance between 2 VSYNCs. The SCREEN_HEIGHT should be built by suitable DI’s counter. ns VSYNC width Tvsw VSYNC_WIDTH VSYNC_WIDTH—Vsync width in DI_CLK with 0.5 DI_CLK resolution. Defined by DI’s counter ns IP14 Vertical blank interval 1 Tvbi1 BGYP—width of first Vertical blanking interval in line.The BGYP should be built by suitable DI’s counter. ns IP15 Vertical blank interval 2 Tvbi2 width of second Vertical blanking interval in line.The FH should be built by suitable DI’s counter. ns BGXP × Tdicp BGYP × Tsw (SCREEN_HEIGHT BGYP - FH) × Tsw i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 89 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 79. Synchronous Display Interface Timing Characteristics (Pixel Level) (continued) ID Symbol Value Todicp DISP_CLK_OFFSET × Tdiclk IP13o Offset of VSYNC Tovs IP8o Offset of HSYNC IP9o Offset of DRDY IP5o 1 Parameter Offset of IPP_DISP_CLK Description Unit DISP_CLK_OFFSET— offset of IPP_DISP_CLK edges from local start point, in DI_CLK×2 (0.5 DI_CLK Resolution) Defined by DISP_CLK counter ns VSYNC_OFFSET × Tdiclk VSYNC_OFFSET—offset of Vsync edges from a local start point, when a Vsync should be active, in DI_CLK×2 (0.5 DI_CLK Resolution).The VSYNC_OFFSET should be built by suitable DI’s counter. ns Tohs HSYNC_OFFSET × Tdiclk HSYNC_OFFSET—offset of Hsync edges from a local start point, when a Hsync should be active, in DI_CLK×2 (0.5 DI_CLK Resolution).The HSYNC_OFFSET should be built by suitable DI’s counter. ns Todrdy DRDY_OFFSET × Tdiclk DRDY_OFFSET— offset of DRDY edges from a suitable local start point, when a corresponding data has been set on the bus, in DI_CLK×2 (0.5 DI_CLK Resolution) The DRDY_OFFSET should be built by suitable DI’s counter. ns Display interface clock period immediate value. ⎧ DISP_CLK_PERIOD ⎪ T diclk × -------------------------------------------------------, DI_CLK_PERIOD ⎪ Tdicp = ⎨ ⎪T ⎛ floor DISP_CLK_PERIOD ------------------------------------------------------- + 0.5 ± 0.5⎞ , ⎪ diclk ⎝ ⎠ DI_CLK_PERIOD ⎩ DISP_CLK_PERIOD for integer ------------------------------------------------------DI_CLK_PERIOD DISP_CLK_PERIOD for fractional ------------------------------------------------------DI_CLK_PERIOD DISP_CLK_PERIOD—number of DI_CLK per one Tdicp. Resolution 1/16 of DI_CLK DI_CLK_PERIOD—relation of between programing clock frequency and current system clock frequency Display interface clock period average value. DISP_CLK_PERIOD Tdicp = T diclk × ------------------------------------------------------DI_CLK_PERIOD 2 DI’s counter can define offset, period and UP/DOWN characteristic of output signal according to programed parameters of the counter. Same of parameters in the table are not defined by DI’s registers directly (by name), but can be generated by corresponding DI’s counter. The SCREEN_WIDTH is an input value for DI’s HSYNC generation counter. The distance between HSYNCs is a SCREEN_WIDTH. The maximal accuracy of UP/DOWN edge of controls is Accuracy = ( 0.5 × T diclk ) ± 0.75ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 90 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics The maximal accuracy of UP/DOWN edge of IPP_DATA is Accuracy = T diclk ±0.75ns The DISP_CLK_PERIOD, DI_CLK_PERIOD parameters are programmed via registers. Figure 55 depicts the synchronous display interface timing for access level. The DISP_CLK_DOWN and DISP_CLK_UP parameters are set via the Register. IP20o IP20 VSYNC HSYNC DRDY other controls IPP_DISP_CLK Tdicu Tdicd IPP_DATA IP16 IP17 IP19 IP18 local start point Figure 55. Synchronous Display Interface Timing Diagram—Access Level Table 80. Synchronous Display Interface Timing Characteristics (Access Level) ID Parameter Symbol Typ1 Min Max Unit IP16 Display interface clock low time Tckl Tdicd-Tdicu–1.5 Tdicd2–Tdicu 3 Tdicd–Tdicu+1.5 ns IP17 Display interface clock high time Tckh Tdicp–Tdicd+Tdicu–1.5 Tdicp–Tdicd+Tdicu Tdicp–Tdicd+Tdicu+1.5 ns IP18 Data setup time Tdsu Tdicd–1.5 Tdicu — ns IP19 Data holdup time Tdhd Tdicp–Tdicd–1.5 Tdicp–Tdicu — ns IP20o Control signals offset times (defines for each pin) Tocsu Tocsu–1.5 Tocsu IP20 Tcsu Control signals setup time to display interface clock (defines for each pin) Tocsu+1.5 Tdicd–1.5–Tocsu%Tdicp Tdicu — — ns 1The exact conditions have not been finalized, but will likely match the current customer requirement for their specific display. These conditions may be chip specific. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 91 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 2 Display interface clock down time 2 × DISP_CLK_DOWN 1 Tdicd = --- ⎛ T diclk × ceil ------------------------------------------------------------- ⎞ ⎠ DI_CLK_PERIOD 2⎝ 3 Display interface clock up time 2 × DISP_CLK_UP 1 Tdicu = --- ⎛ T diclk × ceil --------------------------------------------------- ⎞ DI_CLK_PERIOD ⎠ 2⎝ where CEIL(X) rounds the elements of X to the nearest integers towards infinity. 4.7.8.6 Interface to a TV Encoder The interface has an 8-bit data bus, transferring a single 8-bit value (Y/U/V) in each cycle. The timing of the interface is described in Figure 56. • • • • • NOTE The frequency of the clock DISP_CLK is 27 MHz (within 10%) The HSYNC, VSYNC signals are active low. The DRDY signal is shown as active high. The transition to the next row is marked by the negative edge of the HSYNC signal. It remains low for a single clock cycle The transition to the next field/frame is marked by the negative edge of the VSYNC signal. It remains low for at least one clock cycles — At a transition to an odd field (of the next frame), the negative edges of VSYNC and HSYNC coincide. At a transition is to an even field (of the same frame), they do not coincide. — • The active intervals—during which data is transferred—are marked by the HSYNC signal being high. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 92 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics DISP_CLK HSYNC VSYNC DRDY Cb IPP_DATA Y Cr Y Cb Y Cr Pixel Data Timing HSYNC 523 524 525 1 2 3 5 4 6 10 DRDY VSYNC Even Field HSYNC 261 262 263 Odd Field 264 265 266 267 268 269 273 DRDY VSYNC Even Field Odd Field Line and Field Timing - NTSC HSYNC 621 622 623 624 625 1 3 2 4 23 DRDY VSYNC Even Field HSYNC 308 Odd Field 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 336 DRDY VSYNC Even Field Odd Field Line and Field Timing - PAL Figure 56. TV Encoder Interface Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 93 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.8.6.1 TV Encoder Performance Specifications All the parameters in the table are defined under the following conditions: Rset = 1.05 kΩ ±1%, resistor on VREFOUT pin to Ground Rload = 37.5 Ω ±1%, output load to Ground The TV encoder output specifications are shown in Table 81. Table 81. TV Encoder Video Performance Specifications Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit DAC STATIC PERFORMANCE Resolution1 10 Integral Nonlinearity (INL)2 Differential Nonlinearity (DNL)2 Channel-to-channel gain matching 2 Full scale output voltage2 Bits 1 2 LSBs 0.6 1 LSBs 2 Rset = 1.05 kΩ ±1% Rload = 37.5 Ω±1% 1.24 1.35 % 1.45 V DAC DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE Spurious Free Dynamic Range (SFDR) Fout = 3.38 MHz Fsamp = 216 MHz 59 dBc Spurious Free Dynamic Range (SFDR) Fout = 9.28 MHz Fsamp = 297 MHz 54 dBc Short Term Jitter (Line to Line) 2.5 ±ns Long Term Jitter (Field to Field) 3.5 ±ns VIDEO PERFORMANCE IN SD MODE 2, 3 Frequency Response 0-4.0 MHz -0.1 0.1 dB 5.75 MHz -0.7 0 dB Luminance Nonlinearity 0.5 ±% Differential Gain 0.35 % Differential Phase 0.6 Degrees 75 dB Hue Accuracy 0.8 ±Degrees Color Saturation Accuracy 1.5 ±% Chroma AM Noise -70 dB Chroma PM Noise -47 dB Chroma Nonlinear Phase 0.5 ±Degrees Chroma Nonlinear Gain 2.5 ±% Chroma/Luma Intermodulation 0.1 ±% Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) Flat field full bandwidth i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 94 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 81. TV Encoder Video Performance Specifications (continued) Chroma/Luma Gain Inequality 1.0 ±% Chroma/Luma Delay Inequality 1.0 ±ns VIDEO PERFORMANCE IN HD MODE 2 Luma Frequency Response 0-30 MHz -0.2 0.2 dB Chroma Frequency Response 0-15 MHz, YCbCr 422 mode -0.2 0.2 dB Luma Nonlinearity 3.2 % Chroma Nonlinearity 3.4 % Luma Signal-to-Noise Ratio 0-30 MHz 62 dB Chroma Signal-to-Noise Ratio 0-15 MHz 72 dB 1 Guaranteed by design Guaranteed by characterization 3 R set = VREFOUT's external resistor to ground = 1.05kΩ 2 4.7.8.7 4.7.8.7.1 Asynchronous Interfaces Standard Parallel Interfaces The IPU has four signal generator machines for asynchronous signal. Each machine generates IPU’s internal control levels (0 or 1) by UP and DOWN are defined in Registers. Each asynchronous pin has a dynamic connection with one of the signal generators. This connection is redefined again with a new display access (pixel/component) The IPU can generate control signals according to system 80/68 requirements. The burst length is received as a result from predefined behavior of the internal signal generator machines. The access to a display is realized by the following: • CS (IPP_CS) chip select • WR (IPP_PIN_11) write strobe • RD (IPP_PIN_12) read strobe • RS (IPP_PIN_13) Register select (A0) Both system 80 and system 68k interfaces are supported for all described modes as depicted in Figure 57, Figure 58, Figure 59, and Figure 60. The timing images correspond to active-low IPP_CS, WR and RD signals. Each asynchronous access is defined by an access size parameter. This parameter can be different between different kinds of accesses. This parameter defines a length of windows, when suitable controls of the current access are valid. A pause between two different display accesses can be guaranteed by programing of suitable access sizes. There are no minimal/maximal hold/setup time hard defined by DI. Each control signal can be switched at any time during access size. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 95 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics IPP_CS RS WR RD IPP_DATA Burst access mode with sampling by CS signal IPP_CS RS WR RD IPP_DATA Single access mode (all control signals are not active for one display interface clock after each display access) Figure 57. Asynchronous Parallel System 80 Interface (Type 1) Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 96 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics IPP_CS RS WR RD IPP_DATA Burst access mode with sampling by WR/RD signals IPP_CS RS WR RD IPP_DATA Single access mode (all control signals are not active for one display interface clock after each display access) Figure 58. Asynchronous Parallel System 80 Interface (Type 2) Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 97 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics IPP_CS RS WR (READ/WRITE) RD (ENABLE) IPP_DATA Burst access mode with sampling by CS signal IPP_CS RS WR (READ/WRITE) RD (ENABLE) IPP_DATA Single access mode (all control signals are not active for one display interface clock after each display access) Figure 59. Asynchronous Parallel System 68k Interface (Type 1) Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 98 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics IPP_CS RS WR (READ/WRITE) RD (ENABLE) IPP_DATA Burst access mode with sampling by ENABLE signal IPP_CS RS WR (READ/WRITE) RD (ENABLE) IPP_DATA Single access mode (all control signals are not active for one display interface clock after each display access) Figure 60. Asynchronous Parallel System 68k Interface (Type 2) TIming Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 99 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Display operation can be performed with IPP_WAIT signal. The DI reacts to the incoming IPP_WAIT signal with 2 DI_CLK delay. The DI finishes a current access and a next access is postponed until IPP_WAIT release. Figure 61 shows timing of the parallel interface with IPP_WAIT control. DI clock IPP_CS IPP_DATA WR RD IPP_WAIT IPP_DATA_IN IP39 waiting waiting Figure 61. Parallel Interface Timing Diagram—Read Wait States i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 100 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.8.7.2 Asynchronous Parallel Interface Timing Parameters Figure 62 depicts timing of asynchronous parallel interfaces based on the system 80 and system 68k interfaces. Table 83 shows timing characteristics at display access level. All timing diagrams are based on active low control signals (signals polarity is controlled via the DI_DISP_SIG_POL Register). IP29 IP32 IP35 IP36 IP33 IP30 IP47 IP34 IP31 DI clock IPP_CS RS WR RD IPP_DATA A0 D0 D1 D2 PP_DATA_IN local start point local start point local start point local start point IP27 IP28d IP37 IP38 local start point IP28a D3 Figure 62. Asynchronous Parallel Interface Timing Diagram Table 82. Asynchronous Display Interface Timing Parameters (Pixel Level) ID Parameter Symbol Tcycr Value Description Unit ACCESS_SIZE_# predefined value in DI REGISTER ns IP27 Read system cycle time IP28a Address Write system cycle time Tcycwa ACCESS_SIZE_# predefined value in DI REGISTER ns IP28d Data Write system cycle time Tcycwd ACCESS_SIZE_# predefined value in DI REGISTER ns IP29 RS start Tdcsrr UP# RS strobe switch, predefined value in DI REGISTER ns IP30 CS start Tdcsc UP# CS strobe switch, predefined value in DI REGISTER ns IP31 CS hold Tdchc DOWN# CS strobe release, predefined value in DI REGISTER — i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 101 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 82. Asynchronous Display Interface Timing Parameters (Pixel Level) (continued) ID Parameter Symbol Value Description Unit IP32 RS hold Tdchrr DOWN# RS strobe release, predefined value in DI REGISTER — IP33 Read start Tdcsr UP# read strobe switch, predefined value in DI REGISTER ns IP34 Read hold Tdchr DOWN# read strobe release signal, predefined value in DI REGISTER ns IP35 Write start Tdcsw UP# write strobe switch, predefined value in DI REGISTER ns IP36 Controls hold time for write Tdchw DOWN# write strobe release, predefined value in DI REGISTER ns IP37 Slave device data delay1 Tracc Delay of incoming data Physical delay of display’s data, defined from Read access local start point ns IP38 Slave device data hold time3 Troh IP47 Read time point13 Tdrp 1This Hold time of data on the buss Time that display read data is valid in input bus Data sampling point Point of input data sampling by DI, predefined in DC Microcode ns — parameter is a requirement to the display connected to the IPU. Table 83. Asynchronous Parallel Interface Timing Parameters (Access Level) ID Parameter Symbol IP27 Read system cycle time Tcycr Typ1 Min Max Unit Tdicpr–1.5 Tdicpr2 Tdicpr+1.5 ns Tdicpw+1.5 ns IP28 Write system cycle time Tcycw Tdicpw–1.5 Tdicpw3 IP29 RS start Tdcsrr Tdicurs–1.5 Tdicurs Tdicurs+1.5 ns IP30 CS start Tdcsc Tdicucs–1.5 Tdicur Tdicucs+1.5 ns IP31 CS hold Tdchc TdicdcsTdicucs–1.5 Tdicdcs4–Tdicucs5 Tdicdcs–Tdicucs+1.5 ns Tdicdrs–Tdicurs+1.5 ns IP32 RS hold Tdchrr Tdicdrs–Tdicurs–1.5 Tdicdrs6–Tdicurs7 IP33 Controls setup time for read Tdcsr Tdicur–1.5 Tdicur Tdicur+1.5 ns Tdicdr–Tdicur–1.5 Tdicdr8–Tdicur9 Tdicdr–Tdicur+1.5 ns Tdicuw–1.5 Tdicuw Tdicuw+1.5 ns Tdicdw–Tdicuw–1.5 Tdicpw10–Tdicuw 11 Tdicdw–Tdicuw+1.5 ns IP34 Controls hold time for read Tdchr IP35 Controls setup time for write Tdcsw IP36 Controls hold time for write Tdchw IP37 Slave device data delay 12 Tracc 0 — Tdrp13–Tlbd14–Tdicur–1.5 ns Troh Tdrp–Tlbd–Tdicdr+1.5 — Tdicpr–Tdicdr–1.5 ns IP38 Slave device data hold time8 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 102 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 83. Asynchronous Parallel Interface Timing Parameters (Access Level) (continued) ID Parameter IP39 Setup time for wait signal IP47 Read time point13 Symbol Tswait Tdrp Min Typ1 Max Unit — — — — Tdrp–1.5 Tdrp Tdrp+1.5 ns 1 The exact conditions have not been finalized, but will likely match the current customer requirement for their specific display. These conditions may be chip specific. 2 Display period value for read Tdicpr = T DI_CLK DI_ACCESS_SIZE_# × ceil --------------------------------------------------------DI_CLK_PERIOD ACCESS_SIZE is predefined in REGISTER period value for write 3Display DI_ACCESS_SIZE_# Tdicpw = T DI_CLK × ceil --------------------------------------------------------DI_CLK_PERIOD ACCESS_SIZE is predefined in REGISTER Display control down for CS 4 2 × DISP_DOWN_# 1 Tdicdcs = --- ⎛ T × ceil ----------------------------------------------------- ⎞⎠ DI_CLK_PERIOD 2 ⎝ DI_CLK DISP_DOWN is predefined in REGISTER control up for CS 5Display 2 × DISP_UP_# 1 Tdicucs = --- ⎛ T DI_CLK × ceil ----------------------------------------------- ⎞ DI_CLK_PERIOD ⎠ 2⎝ DISP_UP is predefined in REGISTER control down for RS 6Display 2 × DISP_DOWN_# 1 Tdicdrs = --- ⎛ T DI_CLK × ceil ----------------------------------------------------- ⎞ DI_CLK_PERIOD ⎠ 2⎝ DISP_DOWN is predefined in REGISTER control up for RS 7Display 2 × DISP_UP_# 1 Tdicurs = --- ⎛ T × ceil ----------------------------------------------- ⎞⎠ DI_CLK_PERIOD 2 ⎝ DI_CLK DISP_UP is predefined in REGISTER control down for read 8Display 2 × DISP_DOWN_# 1 Tdicdr = --- ⎛ T DI_CLK × ceil ----------------------------------------------------- ⎞ DI_CLK_PERIOD ⎠ 2⎝ DISP_DOWN is predefined in REGISTER i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 103 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 9 Display control up for read 2 × DISP_UP_# 1 Tdicur = --- ⎛ T DI_CLK × ceil ----------------------------------------------- ⎞ DI_CLK_PERIOD ⎠ 2⎝ DISP_UP is predefined in REGISTER Display control down for read 10 2 × DISP_DOWN_# 1 Tdicdrw = --- ⎛ T × ceil ----------------------------------------------------- ⎞⎠ DI_CLK_PERIOD 2 ⎝ DI_CLK DISP_DOWN is predefined in REGISTER 11 Display control up for write 2 × DISP_UP_# 1 Tdicuw = --- ⎛ T DI_CLK × ceil ----------------------------------------------- ⎞ DI_CLK_PERIOD ⎠ 2⎝ DISP_UP is predefined in REGISTER 12This parameter is a requirement to the display connected to the IPU 13Data read point Tdrp = T DI_CLK DISP#_READ_EN × ceil ------------------------------------------------- DI_CLK_PERIOD Note: DISP#_READ_EN—operand of DC’s MICROCDE READ command to sample incoming data 14Loop back delay Tlbd is the cumulative propagation delay of read controls and read data. It includes an IPU output delay, a chip-level output delay, board delays, a chip-level input delay, an IPU input delay. This value is chip specific. 4.7.8.8 Standard Serial Interfaces The IPU supports the following types of asynchronous serial interfaces: 1. 3-wire (with bidirectional data line). 2. 4-wire (with separate data input and output lines). 3. 5-wire type 1 (with sampling RS by the serial clock). 4. 5-wire type 2 (with sampling RS by the chip select signal). The IPU has four independent outputs and one input. The port can be configured to provide 3, 4, or 5-wire interfaces. Figure 63 depicts the timing diagram of the 3-wire serial interface. The timing diagrams correspond to active-low IPP#_CS signal and the straight polarity of the IPP_CLK signal. For this interface, a bidirectional data line is used outside the chip. The IPU still uses separate input and output data lines (IPP_IND_DISPB_SD_D and IPP_DO_DISPB_SD_D). The I/O mux should provide joining the internal data lines to the bidirectional external line according to the IPP_OBE_DISPB_SD_D signal provided by the IPU. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 104 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics DISPB_D#_CS programed delay programed delay DISPB_SD_D_CLK DISPB_SD_D RW RS D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Input or output data Preamble Figure 63. 3-Wire Serial Interface Timing Diagram Figure 64 depicts timing diagram of the 4-wire serial interface. For this interface, there are separate input and output data lines both inside and outside the chip. Write DISPB_D#_CS programed delay programed delay DISPB_SD_D_CLK DISPB_SD_D (Output) RW RS D7 D6 D5 Preamble D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Output data DISPB_SD_D (Input) Read DISPB_D#_CS programed delay programed delay DISPB_SD_D_CLK DISPB_SD_D (Output) RW RS Preamble DISPB_SD_D (Input) D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Input data Figure 64. 4-Wire Serial Interface Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 105 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Figure 65 depicts timing of the 5-wire serial interface. For this interface, a separate RS line is added. Write DISPB_D#_CS programed delay programed delay DISPB_SD_D_CLK DISPB_SD_D (Output) RW D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Output data Preamble DISPB_SD_D (Input) DISPB_SER_RS programed delay Read DISPB_D#_CS programed delay programed delay DISPB_SD_D_CLK DISPB_SD_D (Output) RW Preamble DISPB_SD_D (Input) DISPB_SER_RS D7 D6 D5 programed delay D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Input data Figure 65. 5-Wire Serial Interface Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 106 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.8.8.1 Asynchronous Serial Interface Timing Parameters Figure 66 depicts timing of the serial interface. Table 84 shows timing characteristics at display access level. IP73 IP72 DI clock IPP_DISPB_DO_SD_D IPP_DO_DISPB_SER_CS IP71 IP70 IPP_DO_DISPB_SER_RS IP68 IP58 IPP_IND_DISPB_SD_D IP59 IP60, IP64, IP66 IP69 IP50, IP52 IP55, IP57, IP61 IP54, IP56, IP65, IP67 local start point IPP_DO_DISPB_SD_D_CLK IP51,53 IP48, IP49, IP62, IP63 Figure 66. Asynchronous Serial Interface Timing Diagram Table 84. Asynchronous Serial Interface Timing Characteristics (Access Level) ID Parameter IP48 Read system cycle time Symbol Tcycr Min Typ 1 Max Unit Tdicpr–1.5 Tdicpr2 Tdicpr+1.5 ns Tdicpw+1.5 ns Tdicdr–Tdicur+1.5 ns Tdicpr–Tdicdr+Tdicur+ 1.5 ns IP49 Write system cycle time Tcycw Tdicpw–1.5 Tdicpw3 IP50 Read clock low pulse width Trl Tdicdr–Tdicur–1.5 Tdicdr4–Tdicur5 IP51 Read clock high pulse width Trh Tdicpr–Tdicdr+Tdicur–1.5 Tdicpr–Tdicdr+ Tdicur i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 107 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 84. Asynchronous Serial Interface Timing Characteristics (Access Level) (continued) ID Parameter Symbol Typ 1 Min Max Unit IP52 Write clock low pulse width Twl Tdicdw–Tdicuw–1.5 Tdicdw6–Tdicuw 7 Tdicdw–Tdicuw+1.5 ns IP53 Write clock high pulse width Twh Tdicpw–Tdicdw+ Tdicuw–1.5 Tdicpw–Tdicdw+ Tdicuw ns IP54 Controls setup time for read Tdcsr Tdicur–1.5 Tdicur — ns IP55 Controls hold time for read Tdchr Tdicpr–Tdicdr–1.5 Tdicpr–Tdicdr — ns IP56 Controls setup time for write Tdcsw Tdicuw–1.5 Tdicuw — ns IP57 Controls hold time for write Tdicpw–Tdicdw–1.5 Tdicpw–Tdicdw Tdchw — ns ns ns 0 — Tdrp9–Tlbd10-Tdicur-1.5 IP59 Slave device data hold time 8 Troh Tdrp-Tlbd-Tdicdr+1.5 — Tdicpr-Tdicdr-1.5 IP60 Write data setup time Tds Tdicdw-1.5 Tdicdw — ns IP61 Write data hold time Tdh Tdicpw-Tdicdw-1.5 Tdicpw-Tdicdw — ns Tdicpr Tdicpr-1.5 Tdicpr Tdicpr+1.5 ns Tdicpw Tdicpw-1.5 Tdicpw Tdicpw+1.5 ns Tdicdr Tdicdr-1.5 Tdicdr Tdicdr+1.5 ns Tdicur Tdicur-1.5 Tdicur Tdicur+1.5 ns Tdicdw Tdicdw-1.5 Tdicdw Tdicdw+1.5 ns Tdicuw Tdicuw-1.5 Tdicuw Tdicuw+1.5 ns Tdrp Tdrp-1.5 Tdrp Tdrp+1.5 ns Toclk Toclk-1.5 Toclk Toclk+1.5 ns Tdicurs Tdicurs–1.5 Tdicurs Tdicurs+1.5 ns Tdicdrs Tdicdrs -1.5 Tdicdrs Tdicdrs+1.5 ns Tdicucs Tdicucs –1.5 Tdicucs Tdicucs+1.5 ns Tdicdcs Tdicdcs –1.5 Tdicdcs Tdicdcs+1.5 ns IP58 Slave device data IP62 Read period 2 IP63 Write period3 IP64 Read down time4 IP65 Read up time5 IP66 Write down time 6 IP67 Write up time 7 IP68 Read time point9 IP69 Clock offset11 IP70 RS up time 12 IP71 RS down time 13 IP72 CS up time 14 IP73 CS down time 15 delay8 Tdicpw–Tdicdw+ Tdicuw+1.5 Tracc 1The exact conditions have not been finalized, but will likely match the current customer requirement for their specific display. These conditions may be chip specific. 2Display interface clock period value for read DISP#_IF_CLK_PER_RD Tdicpr = T DI_CLK × ceil -------------------------------------------------------------------DI_CLK_PERIOD 3Display interface clock period value for write DISP#_IF_CLK_PER_WR Tdicpw = T DI_CLK × ceil ---------------------------------------------------------------------DI_CLK_PERIOD i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 108 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4 Display interface clock down time for read 2 × DISP_DOWN_# 1 Tdicdr = --- ⎛ T DI_CLK × ceil ----------------------------------------------------- ⎞ DI_CLK_PERIOD ⎠ 2⎝ 5 Display interface clock up time for read 2 × DISP_UP_# 1 Tdicur = --- ⎛ T DI_CLK × ceil ----------------------------------------------- ⎞ DI_CLK_PERIOD ⎠ 2⎝ 6 Display interface clock down time for write 2 × DISP_DOWN_# 1 Tdicdw = --- ⎛ T DI_CLK × ceil ----------------------------------------------------- ⎞ DI_CLK_PERIOD ⎠ 2⎝ 7 Display interface clock up time for write 2 × DISP_UP_# 1 Tdicuw = --- ⎛ T DI_CLK × ceil ----------------------------------------------- ⎞ DI_CLK_PERIOD ⎠ 2⎝ 8This 9Data parameter is a requirement to the display connected to the IPU read point DISP_READ_EN Tdrp = T DI_CLK × ceil ----------------------------------------------DI_CLK_PERIOD DISP_RD_EN is predefined in REGISTER back delay Tlbd is the cumulative propagation delay of read controls and read data. It includes an IPU output delay, a chip-level output delay, board delays, a chip-level input delay, an IPU input delay. This value is chip specific. 11Display interface clock offset value 10Loop Toclk = T DI_CLK DISP_CLK_OFFSET × ceil -------------------------------------------------------DI_CLK_PERIOD CLK_OFFSET is predefined in REGISTER 12Display RS up time DISP_RS_UP_# Tdicurs = T DI_CLK × ceil ----------------------------------------------DI_CLK_PERIOD DISP_RS_UP is predefined in REGISTER 13Display RS down time DISP_RS_DOWN_# Tdicdrs = T DI_CLK × ceil -----------------------------------------------------DI_CLK_PERIOD DISP_RS_DOWN is predefined in REGISTER 14Display RS up time DISP_CS_UP_# Tdicucs = T DI_CLK × ceil ----------------------------------------------DI_CLK_PERIOD DISP_CS_UP is predefined in REGISTER i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 109 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 15 Display RS down time DISP_CS_DOWN_# Tdicdcs = ( T DI_CLK × ceil ) -----------------------------------------------------DI_CLK_PERIOD DISP_CS_DOWN is predefined in REGISTER. 4.7.9 1-Wire Timing Parameters Figure 67 depicts the RPP timing, and Table 85 lists the RPP timing parameters. 1-WIRE Tx “Reset Pulse” DS2502 Tx “Presence Pulse” OW2 One-Wire bus (BATT_LINE) OW3 OW1 OW4 Figure 67. Reset and Presence Pulses (RPP) Timing Diagram Table 85. RPP Sequence Delay Comparisons Timing Parameters ID Parameters Symbol Min Typ Max Unit OW1 Reset Time Low tRSTL 480 511 — µs OW2 Presence Detect High tPDH 15 — 60 µs OW3 Presence Detect Low tPDL 60 — 240 µs OW4 Reset Time High tRSTH 480 512 — µs Figure 68 depicts Write 0 Sequence timing, and Table 86 lists the timing parameters. OW6 One-Wire bus (BATT_LINE) OW5 Figure 68. Write 0 Sequence Timing Diagram Table 86. WR0 Sequence Timing Parameters ID Parameter OW5 Write 0 Low Time OW6 Transmission Time Slot Symbol Min Typ Max Unit tWR0_low 60 100 120 µs tSLOT OW5 117 120 µs i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 110 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Figure 69 depicts Write 1 Sequence timing, Figure 70 depicts the Read Sequence timing, and Table 87 lists the timing parameters. OW8 One-Wire bus (BATT_LINE) OW7 Figure 69. Write 1 Sequence Timing Diagram OW8 One-Wire bus (BATT_LINE) OW7 OW9 Figure 70. Read Sequence Timing Diagram Table 87. WR1 /RD Timing Parameters ID Parameter Symbol Min Typ Max Unit OW7 Write /Read Low Time tLOW1 1 5 15 µs OW8 Transmission Time Slot tSLOT 60 117 120 µs OW9 Release Time tRELEASE 15 — 45 µs 4.7.10 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Timing Parameters This section describes the electrical information of the PWM.The PWM can be programmed to select one of three clock signals as its source frequency. The selected clock signal is passed through a prescaler before being input to the counter. The output is available at the pulse-width modulator output (PWMO) external pin. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 111 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Figure 71 depicts the timing of the PWM, and Table 88 lists the PWM timing parameters. 1 2a 3b System Clock 2b 3a 4b 4a PWM Output Figure 71. PWM Timing Table 88. PWM Output Timing Parameter Ref. No. 1 Parameter Min Max Unit 0 ipg_clk MHz 1 System CLK frequency1 2a Clock high time 12.29 — ns 2b Clock low time 9.91 — ns 3a Clock fall time — 0.5 ns 3b Clock rise time — 0.5 ns 4a Output delay time — 9.37 ns 4b Output setup time 8.71 — ns CL of PWMO = 30 pF 4.7.11 P-ATA Timing Parameters This section describes the timing parameters of the Parallel ATA module which are compliant with ATA/ATAPI-5 specification. Parallel ATA module can work on PIO/Multi-Word DMA/Ultra DMA transfer modes. Each transfer mode has different data transfer rate, Ultra DMA mode 4 data transfer rate is up to 100MB/s. Parallel ATA module interface consist of a total of 29 pins, Some pins act on different function in different transfer mode. There are different requirements of timing relationships among the function pins conform with ATA/ATAPI-5 specification and these requirements are configurable by the ATA module registers. Table 89 and Figure 72 define the AC characteristics of all the P-ATA interface signals on all data transfer modes. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 112 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics ATA Interface Signals SI2 SI1 Figure 72. P-ATA Interface Signals Timing Diagram Table 89. AC Characteristics of All Interface Signals ID 1 Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit SI1 Rising edge slew rate for any signal on ATA interface.1 Srise — 1.25 V/ns SI2 Falling edge slew rate for any signal on ATA interface (see note) Sfall — 1.25 V/ns SI3 Host interface signal capacitance at the host connector Chost — 20 pF SRISE and SFALL shall meet this requirement when measured at the sender’s connector from 10–90% of full signal amplitude with all capacitive loads from 15 –40 pF where all signals have the same capacitive load value. The user needs to use level shifters for 5.0 V compatibility on the ATA interface. The i.MX51 P-ATA interface is 3.3 V compatible. The use of bus buffers introduces delay on the bus and introduces skew between signal lines. These factors make it difficult to operate the bus at the highest speed (UDMA-5) when bus buffers are used. If fast UDMA mode operation is needed, this may not be compatible with bus buffers. Another area of attention is the slew rate limit imposed by the ATA specification on the ATA bus. According to this limit, any signal driven on the bus should have a slew rate between 0.4 and 1.2 V/ns with a 40 pF load. Not many vendors of bus buffers specify slew rate of the outgoing signals. When bus buffers are used, the ata_data bus buffer is special. This is a bidirectional bus buffer, so a direction control signal is needed. This direction control signal is ata_buffer_en. When its high, the bus should drive from host to device. When its low, the bus should drive from device to host. Steering of the signal is such that contention on the host and device tri-state busses is always avoided. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 113 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics In the timing equations, some timing parameters are used. These parameters depend on the implementation of the i.MX51 P-ATA interface on silicon, the bus buffer used, the cable delay and cable skew. Table 90 shows ATA timing parameters. Table 90. P-ATA Timing Parameters Name T ti_ds ti_dh Bus clock period (ipg_clk_ata) Peripheral clock frequency Set-up time ata_data to ata_iordy edge (UDMA-in only) UDMA0 UDMA1 UDMA2, UDMA3 UDMA4 UDMA5 15 ns 10 ns 7 ns 5 ns 4 ns Hold time ata_iordy edge to ata_data (UDMA-in only) UDMA0, UDMA1, UDMA2, UDMA3, UDMA4 UDMA5 5.0 ns 4.6 ns tco Propagation delay bus clock L-to-H to ata_cs0, ata_cs1, ata_da2, ata_da1, ata_da0, ata_dior, ata_diow, ata_dmack, ata_data, ata_buffer_en 12.0 ns tsu Set-up time ata_data to bus clock L-to-H 8.5 ns tsui Set-up time ata_iordy to bus clock H-to-L 8.5 ns thi Hold time ata_iordy to bus clock H to L 2.5 ns tskew1 Max difference in propagation delay bus clock L-to-H to any of following signals ata_cs0, ata_cs1, ata_da2, ata_da1, ata_da0, ata_dior, ata_diow, ata_dmack, ata_data (write), ata_buffer_en 7 ns tskew2 Max difference in buffer propagation delay for any of following signals ata_cs0, ata_cs1, ata_da2, ata_da1, ata_da0, ata_dior, ata_diow, ata_dmack, ata_data (write), ata_buffer_en Transceiver tskew3 Max difference in buffer propagation delay for any of following signals ata_iordy, ata_data (read) Transceiver Max buffer propagation delay Transceiver tbuf 1 Value/ Contributing Factor1 Description tcable1 Cable propagation delay for ata_data Cable tcable2 Cable propagation delay for control signals ata_dior, ata_diow, ata_iordy, ata_dmack Cable tskew4 Max difference in cable propagation delay between ata_iordy and ata_data (read) Cable tskew5 Max difference in cable propagation delay between (ata_dior, ata_diow, ata_dmack) and ata_cs0, ata_cs1, ata_da2, ata_da1, ata_da0, ata_data(write) Cable tskew6 Max difference in cable propagation delay without accounting for ground bounce Cable Values provided where applicable. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 114 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.11.1 PIO Mode Read Timing Figure 73 shows timing for PIO read, and Table 91 lists the timing parameters for PIO read. Figure 73. PIO Read Timing Diagram Table 91. PIO Read Timing Parameters ATA Parameter Parameter from Figure 73 Controlling Variable Value t1 t1 t2 t2r t9 t9 × T – (tskew1 + tskew2 + tskew5) t2 min) = time_2r × T – (tskew1 + tskew2 + tskew5) t9 (min) = time_9 × T – (tskew1 + tskew2 + tskew6) t5 t5 t5 (min) = tco + tsu + tbuf + tbuf + tcable1 + tcable2 t6 t6 0 tA tA tA (min) = (1.5 + time_ax) × T – (tco + tsui + tcable2 + tcable2 + 2×tbuf) trd trd1 t0 — t1 (min) = time_1 time_1 time_2r time_3 If not met, increase time_2 — trd1 (max) = (–trd) + (tskew3 + tskew4) trd1 (min) = (time_pio_rdx – 0.5)×T – (tsu + thi) (time_pio_rdx – 0.5) × T > tsu + thi + tskew3 + tskew4 t0 (min) = (time_1 + time_2 + time_9) ×T time_ax time_pio_rdx time_1, time_2r, time_9 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 115 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Figure 74 shows timing for PIO write, and Table 92 lists the timing parameters for PIO write. Figure 74. Multi-word DMA (MDMA) Timing Table 92. PIO Write Timing Parameters ATA Parameter Parameter from Figure 74 Controlling Variable Value t1 (min) = time_1 × T – (tskew1 + tskew2 + tskew5) time_1 t1 t1 t2 t2w t9 t9 t9 (min) = time_9 × T – (tskew1 + tskew2 + tskew6) t3 — t3 (min) = (time_2w – time_on)× T – (tskew1 + tskew2 +tskew5) t4 t4 t4 (min) = time_4 × T – tskew1 time_4 tA tA tA = (1.5 + time_ax) × T – (tco + tsui + tcable2 + tcable2 + 2×tbuf) time_ax t0 — t0(min) = (time_1 + time_2 + time_9) × T — — Avoid bus contention when switching buffer on by making ton long enough — — — Avoid bus contention when switching buffer off by making toff long enough — t2 (min) = time_2w × T – (tskew1 + tskew2 + tskew5) time_2w time_9 If not met, increase time_2w time_1, time_2r, time_9 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 116 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Figure 75 shows timing for MDMA read, Figure 76 shows timing for MDMA write, and Table 93 lists the timing parameters for MDMA read and write. Figure 75. MDMA Read Timing Diagram Figure 76. MDMA Write Timing Diagram Table 93. MDMA Read and Write Timing Parameters ATA Parameter Parameter from Figure 75, Figure 76 tm, ti tm td td, td1 tk tk t0 — tg(read) tgr tgr (min-read) = tco + tsu + tbuf + tbuf + tcable1 + tcable2 tgr.(min-drive) = td – te(drive) tf(read) tfr tfr (min-drive) = 0 tg(write) — tf(write) — tL — Value × T – (tskew1 + tskew2 + tskew5) td1.(min) = td (min) = time_d × T – (tskew1 + tskew2 + tskew6) tk.(min) = time_k × T – (tskew1 + tskew2 + tskew6) t0 (min) = (time_d + time_k) × T tm (min) = ti (min) = time_m × T – (tskew1 + tskew2 + tskew5) tf (min-write) = time_k × T – (tskew1 + tskew2 + tskew6) tL (max) = (time_d + time_k–2)×T – (tsu + tco + 2×tbuf + 2×tcable2) tg (min-write) = time_d Controlling Variable time_m time_d time_k time_d, time_k time_d — time_d time_k time_d, time_k i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 117 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 93. MDMA Read and Write Timing Parameters (continued) ATA Parameter Parameter from Figure 75, Figure 76 tn, tj tkjn tn= tj= tkjn = (max(time_k,. time_jn) — ton toff ton = time_on toff = time_off 4.7.11.2 Value × T – (tskew1 + tskew2 + tskew6) × T – tskew1 × T – tskew1 Controlling Variable time_jn — Ultra DMA (UDMA) Input Timing Figure 77 shows timing when the UDMA in transfer starts, Figure 78 shows timing when the UDMA in host terminates transfer, Figure 79 shows timing when the UDMA in device terminates transfer, and Table 94 lists the timing parameters for UDMA in burst. Figure 77. UDMA In Transfer Starts Timing Diagram Figure 78. UDMA In Host Terminates Transfer Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 118 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Figure 79. UDMA In Device Terminates Transfer Timing Diagram Table 94. UDMA In Burst Timing Parameters ATA Parameter Parameter from Figure 77, Figure 78, Figure 79 tack tack tack (min) = (time_ack × T) – (tskew1 + tskew2) time_ack tenv tenv tenv (min) = (time_env × T) – (tskew1 + tskew2) tenv (max) = (time_env × T) + (tskew1 + tskew2) time_env tds tds1 tds – (tskew3) – ti_ds > 0 tdh tdh1 tdh – (tskew3) – ti_dh > 0 tcyc tc1 (tcyc – tskew) > T trp trp trp (min) = time_rp × T – (tskew1 + tskew2 + tskew6) time_rp — tx11 (time_rp × T) – (tco + tsu + 3T + 2 time_rp tmli tmli1 tmli1 (min) = (time_mlix + 0.4) × T time_mlix tzah tzah tzah (min) = (time_zah + 0.4) × T time_zah tdzfs tdzfs tdzfs = (time_dzfs × T) – (tskew1 + tskew2) time_dzfs tcvh tcvh tcvh = (time_cvh ×T) – (tskew1 + tskew2) time_cvh — ton toff2 ton = time_on × T – tskew1 toff = time_off × T – tskew1 Description Controlling Variable tskew3, ti_ds, ti_dh should be low enough T big enough ×tbuf + 2×tcable2) > trfs (drive) — 1 There is a special timing requirement in the ATA host that requires the internal DIOW to go only high 3 clocks after the last active edge on the DSTROBE signal. The equation given on this line tries to capture this constraint. 2 Make ton and toff big enough to avoid bus contention. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 119 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.11.3 UDMA Output Timing Figure 80 shows timing when the UDMA out transfer starts, Figure 81 shows timing when the UDMA out host terminates transfer, Figure 82 shows timing when the UDMA out device terminates transfer, and Table 95 lists the timing parameters for UDMA out burst. Figure 80. UDMA Out Transfer Starts Timing Diagram Figure 81. UDMA Out Host Terminates Transfer Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 120 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Figure 82. UDMA Out Device Terminates Transfer Timing Diagram Table 95. UDMA Out Burst Timing Parameters ATA Parameter Parameter from Figure 80, Figure 81, Figure 82 tack tack tack (min) = (time_ack × T) – (tskew1 + tskew2) time_ack tenv tenv tenv (min) = (time_env × T) – (tskew1 + tskew2) tenv (max) = (time_env × T) + (tskew1 + tskew2) time_env tdvs tdvs tdvs = (time_dvs × T) – (tskew1 + tskew2) time_dvs tdvh tdvh tdvs = (time_dvh × T) – (tskew1 + tskew2) time_dvh tcyc tcyc tcyc = time_cyc × T – (tskew1 + tskew2) time_cyc t2cyc — t2cyc = time_cyc × 2 × T time_cyc trfs1 trfs trfs = 1.6 × T + tsui + tco + tbuf + tbuf — tdzfs tss tss tmli tdzfs_mli tli Value tdzfs = time_dzfs × T – (tskew1) tss = time_ss × T – (tskew1 + tskew2) Controlling Variable — time_dzfs time_ss tdzfs_mli =max (time_dzfs, time_mli) × T – (tskew1 + tskew2) — tli1 tli1 > 0 — tli tli2 tli2 > 0 — tli tli3 tli3 > 0 — tcvh tcvh tcvh = (time_cvh ×T) – (tskew1 + tskew2) — ton toff ton = time_on × T – tskew1 toff = time_off × T – tskew1 time_cvh — i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 121 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.12 SIM (Subscriber Identification Module) Timing This section describes the electrical parameters of the SIM module. Each SIM module interface consists of 12 signals (two separate ports each containing six signals). Typically a a port uses five signals. The interface is designed to be used with synchronous SIM cards meaning the SIM module provides the clock used by the SIM card. The clock frequency is typically 372 times the Tx/Rxdata rate, however the SIM module can work with CLK frequencies of 16 times the Tx/Rx data rate. There is no timing relationship between the clock and the data. The clock that the SIM module provides to the SIM card is used by the SIM card to recover the clock from the data in the same manner as standard UART data exchanges. All six signals (5 for bi-directional Tx/Rx) of the SIM module are asynchronous to each other. There are no required timing relationships between signals in normal mode. The SIM card is initiated by the interface device; the SIM card responds with Answer to Reset. Although the SIM interface has no defined requirements, the ISO-7816 defines reset and power-down sequences. (For detailed information, see ISO-7816.) Table 96 defines the general timing requirements for the SIM interface. Table 96. SIM Timing Parameters, High Drive Strength ID Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit SI1 SIM Clock Frequency (SIMx_CLKy)1, Sfreq 0.01 25 MHz SI2 SIM Clock Rise Time (SIMx_CLKy)2 Srise — 0.09×(1/Sfreq ) ns SI3 SIM Clock Fall Time (SIMx_CLKy)3 Sfall — 0.09×(1/Sfreq ) ns SI4 SIM Input Transition Time (SIMx_DATAy_RX_TX, SIMx_SIMPDy) Strans 10 25 ns SI5 SIM I/O Rise Time / Fall Time(SIMx_DATAy_RX_TX)4 Tr/Tf — 1 µs SI6 SIM RST Rise Time / Fall Time(SIMx_RSTy)5 Tr/Tf — 1 µs 1 50% duty cycle clock With C = 50 pF 3 With C = 50 pF 4 With Cin = 30 pF, Cout = 30 pF 5 With Cin = 30 pF 2 1/SI1 SIMx_CLKy SI3 SI2 Figure 83. SIM Clock Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 122 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.12.1 4.7.12.1.1 Reset Sequence Cards with internal reset The sequence of reset for this kind of SIM Cards is as follows (see Figure 84): • After power up, the clock signal is enabled on SIMx_CLKy(time T0) • After 200 clock cycles, RX must be high. • The card must send a response on RX acknowledging the reset between 400 and 40000 clock cycles after T0. SIMx_SVENy SIMx_CLKy SIMx_DATAy_RX_TX response 1 2 T0 400 clock cycles < 1 < 200 clock cycles 2 < 40000 clock cycles Figure 84. Internal-Reset Card Reset Sequence 4.7.12.1.2 Cards with Active Low Reset The sequence of reset for this kind of card is as follows (see Figure 85): • After power-up, the clock signal is enabled on SIMx_CLKy (time T0) • After 200 clock cycles, SIMx_DATAy_RX_TX must be high. • SIMx_RSTy must remain Low for at least 40000 clock cycles after T0 (no response is to be received on RX during those 40000 clock cycles) • SIMx_RSTy is set High (time T1) • SIMx_RSTy must remain High for at least 40000 clock cycles after T1 and a response must be received on SIMx_DATAy_RX_TX between 400 and 40000 clock cycles after T1. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 123 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics SIMx_SVENy SIMx_RSTy SIMx_CLKy response SIMx_DATAy_RX_TX 2 1 3 3 T0 T1 1 < 200 clock cycles 400 clock cycles < 2 < 40000 clock cycles 400000 clock cycles < 3 Figure 85. Active-Low-Reset Cards Reset Sequence 4.7.12.2 Power Down Sequence Power down sequence for SIM interface is as follows: • SIMx_SIMPDy port detects the removal of the SIM Card • SIMx_RSTy goes Low • SIMx_CLKy goes Low • SIMx_DATAy_RX_TX goes Low • SIMx_SVENy goes Low Each of these steps is done in one CKIL period (usually 32 kHz). Power-down can be started because of a SIM Card removal detection or launched by the processor. Find in the table and figure below the usual timing requirements for this sequence, with Fckil = CKIL frequency value. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 124 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics SI10 SIMx_SIMPDy SIMx_RSTy SI7 SIMx_CLKy SI8 SIMx_DATAy_RX_TX SI9 SIMx_SVENy Figure 86. SmartCard Interface Power Down AC Timing Table 97. Timing Requirements for Power Down Sequence ID Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit SI7 SIM reset to SIM clock stop Srst2clk 0.9×1/Fckil 1.1×1/Fckil ns SI8 SIM reset to SIM TX data low Srst2dat 1.8×1/Fckil 2.2×1/Fckil ns SI9 SIM reset to SIM voltage enable low Srst2ven 2.7×1/Fckil 3.3×1/Fckil ns SI10 SIM presence detect to SIM reset low Spd2rst 0.9×1/Fckil 1.1×1/Fckil ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 125 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.13 SCAN JTAG Controller (SJC) Timing Parameters Figure 87 depicts the SJC test clock input timing. Figure 88 depicts the SJC boundary scan timing. Figure 89 depicts the SJC test access port. Signal parameters are listed in Table 98. SJ1 SJ2 TCK (Input) SJ2 VM VIH VM VIL SJ3 SJ3 Figure 87. Test Clock Input Timing Diagram TCK (Input) VIH VIL SJ4 Data Inputs SJ5 Input Data Valid SJ6 Data Outputs Output Data Valid SJ7 Data Outputs SJ6 Data Outputs Output Data Valid Figure 88. Boundary Scan (JTAG) Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 126 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics TCK (Input) VIH VIL SJ8 TDI TMS (Input) SJ9 Input Data Valid SJ10 TDO (Output) Output Data Valid SJ11 TDO (Output) SJ10 TDO (Output) Output Data Valid Figure 89. Test Access Port Timing Diagram TCK (Input) SJ13 TRST (Input) SJ12 Figure 90. TRST Timing Diagram Table 98. JTAG Timing All Frequencies Parameter1,2 ID Unit Min Max 0.001 22 MHz 45 — ns 22.5 — ns SJ0 TCK frequency of operation 1/(3•TDC )1 SJ1 TCK cycle time in crystal mode SJ2 TCK clock pulse width measured at VM2 SJ3 TCK rise and fall times — 3 ns SJ4 Boundary scan input data set-up time 5 — ns SJ5 Boundary scan input data hold time 24 — ns SJ6 TCK low to output data valid — 40 ns SJ7 TCK low to output high impedance — 40 ns SJ8 TMS, TDI data set-up time 5 — ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 127 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 98. JTAG Timing (continued) All Frequencies Parameter1,2 ID Unit Min Max SJ9 TMS, TDI data hold time 25 — ns SJ10 TCK low to TDO data valid — 44 ns SJ11 TCK low to TDO high impedance — 44 ns SJ12 TRST assert time 100 — ns SJ13 TRST set-up time to TCK low 40 — ns 1 2 TDC = target frequency of SJC VM = mid-point voltage 4.7.14 SPDIF Timing Parameters Table 99 shows the timing parameters for the Sony/Philips Digital Interconnect Format (SPDIF). Table 99. SPDIF Timing All Frequencies Characteristics Symbol SPDIFOUT output (load = 50 pF) • Skew • Transition rising • Transition falling — SPDIFOUT output (load = 30 pF) • Skew • Transition rising • Transition falling 4.7.15 — Unit Min Max — — — 1.5 24.2 31.3 ns — — — 1.5 13.6 18.0 ns SSI Timing Parameters This section describes the timing parameters of the SSI module. The connectivity of the serial synchronous interfaces is summarized in Table 100. Table 100. AUDMUX Port Allocation Port Signal Nomenclature Type and Access AUDMUX port 1 SSI 1 Internal AUDMUX port 2 SSI 2 Internal AUDMUX port 3 AUD3 External – AUD3 I/O AUDMUX port 4 AUD4 External – EIM or CSPI1 I/O via IOMUX AUDMUX port 5 AUD5 External – EIM or SD1 I/O via IOMUX i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 128 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 100. AUDMUX Port Allocation (continued) • • Port Signal Nomenclature Type and Access AUDMUX port 6 AUD6 External – EIM or DISP2 via IOMUX AUDMUX port 7 SSI 3 Internal NOTE The terms WL and BL used in the timing diagrams and tables refer to Word Length (WL) and Bit Length (BL). The SSI timing diagrams use generic signal names wherein the names used in the i.MX51 reference manual are channel specific signal names. For example, a channel clock referenced in the IOMUXC chapter as AUD3_TXC appears in the timing diagram as TXC. . SS1 SS5 SS2 SS3 SS4 TXC (Output) SS8 SS6 TXFS (bl) (Output) SS10 SS12 SS14 TXFS (wl) (Output) SS15 SS16 SS18 SS17 TXD (Output) SS43 SS42 SS19 RXD (Input) Note: SRXD input in synchronous mode only Figure 91. SSI Transmitter Internal Clock Timing Diagram 4.7.15.1 SSI Transmitter Timing with Internal Clock Table 101. SSI Transmitter Timing with Internal Clock ID Parameter Min Max Unit Internal Clock Operation SS1 (Tx/Rx) CK clock period 81.4 — ns SS2 (Tx/Rx) CK clock high period 36.0 — ns SS3 (Tx/Rx) CK clock rise time — 6.0 ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 129 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 101. SSI Transmitter Timing with Internal Clock (continued) ID Parameter Min Max Unit 36.0 — ns SS4 (Tx/Rx) CK clock low period SS5 (Tx/Rx) CK clock fall time — 6.0 ns SS6 (Tx) CK high to FS (bl) high — 15.0 ns SS8 (Tx) CK high to FS (bl) low — 15.0 ns SS10 (Tx) CK high to FS (wl) high — 15.0 ns SS12 (Tx) CK high to FS (wl) low — 15.0 ns SS14 (Tx/Rx) Internal FS rise time — 6.0 ns SS15 (Tx/Rx) Internal FS fall time — 6.0 ns SS16 (Tx) CK high to STXD valid from high impedance — 15.0 ns SS17 (Tx) CK high to STXD high/low — 15.0 ns SS18 (Tx) CK high to STXD high impedance — 15.0 ns SS19 STXD rise/fall time — 6.0 ns Synchronous Internal Clock Operation SS42 SRXD setup before (Tx) CK falling 30 — ns SS43 SRXD hold after (Tx) CK falling 0.0 — ns SS52 Loading — 25.0 pF • • • • • NOTE All the timings for the SSI are given for a non-inverted serial clock polarity (TSCKP/RSCKP = 0) and a non-inverted frame sync (TFSI/RFSI = 0). If the polarity of the clock and/or the frame sync have been inverted, all the timing remains valid by inverting the clock signal STCK/SRCK and/or the frame sync STFS/SRFS shown in the tables and in the figures. All timings are on Audiomux Pads when SSI is being used for data transfer. The terms WL and BL refer to Word Length (WL) and Bit Length (BL). ”Tx” and “Rx” refer to the Transmit and Receive sections of the SSI. For internal Frame Sync operation using external clock, the FS timing is same as that of Tx Data (for example, during AC97 mode of operation). i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 130 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.15.2 SSI Receiver Timing with Internal Clock SS1 SS3 SS5 SS4 SS2 TXC (Output) SS9 SS7 TXFS (bl) (Output) SS11 TXFS (wl) (Output) SS13 SS20 SS21 RXD (Input) SS47 SS48 SS51 SS49 SS50 RXC (Output) Figure 92. SSI Receiver Internal Clock Timing Diagram Table 102. SSI Receiver Timing with Internal Clock ID Parameter Min Max Unit Internal Clock Operation SS1 (Tx/Rx) CK clock period 81.4 — ns SS2 (Tx/Rx) CK clock high period 36.0 — ns SS3 (Tx/Rx) CK clock rise time — 6.0 ns SS4 (Tx/Rx) CK clock low period 36.0 — ns SS5 (Tx/Rx) CK clock fall time — 6.0 ns SS7 (Rx) CK high to FS (bl) high — 15.0 ns SS9 (Rx) CK high to FS (bl) low — 15.0 ns SS11 (Rx) CK high to FS (wl) high — 15.0 ns SS13 (Rx) CK high to FS (wl) low — 15.0 ns SS20 SRXD setup time before (Rx) CK low 30 — ns SS21 SRXD hold time after (Rx) CK low 0.0 — ns 15.04 — ns Oversampling Clock Operation SS47 Oversampling clock period i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 131 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 102. SSI Receiver Timing with Internal Clock (continued) ID Parameter Min Max Unit SS48 Oversampling clock high period 6.0 — ns SS49 Oversampling clock rise time — 3.0 ns SS50 Oversampling clock low period 6.0 — ns SS51 Oversampling clock fall time — 3.0 ns • • • • • NOTE All the timings for the SSI are given for a non-inverted serial clock polarity (TSCKP/RSCKP = 0) and a non-inverted frame sync (TFSI/RFSI = 0). If the polarity of the clock and/or the frame sync have been inverted, all the timing remains valid by inverting the clock signal STCK/SRCK and/or the frame sync STFS/SRFS shown in the tables and in the figures. All timings are on Audiomux Pads when SSI is being used for data transfer. “Tx” and “Rx” refer to the Transmit and Receive sections of the SSI. The terms WL and BL refer to Word Length (WL) and Bit Length (BL). For internal Frame Sync operation using external clock, the FS timing is same as that of Tx Data (for example, during AC97 mode of operation). i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 132 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.15.3 SSI Transmitter Timing with External Clock SS22 SS23 SS25 SS26 SS24 TXC (Input) SS27 SS29 TXFS (bl) (Input) SS33 SS31 TXFS (wl) (Input) SS37 SS39 SS38 TXD (Output) SS45 SS44 RXD (Input) SS46 Note: SRXD Input in Synchronous mode only Figure 93. SSI Transmitter External Clock Timing Diagram Table 103. SSI Transmitter Timing with External Clock ID Parameter Min Max Unit External Clock Operation SS22 (Tx/Rx) CK clock period 81.4 — ns SS23 (Tx/Rx) CK clock high period 36.0 — ns SS24 (Tx/Rx) CK clock rise time — 6.0 ns SS25 (Tx/Rx) CK clock low period 36.0 — ns SS26 (Tx/Rx) CK clock fall time — 6.0 ns SS27 (Tx) CK high to FS (bl) high –10.0 15.0 ns SS29 (Tx) CK high to FS (bl) low 10.0 — ns SS31 (Tx) CK high to FS (wl) high –10.0 15.0 ns SS33 (Tx) CK high to FS (wl) low 10.0 — ns SS37 (Tx) CK high to STXD valid from high impedance — 15.0 ns SS38 (Tx) CK high to STXD high/low — 30 ns SS39 (Tx) CK high to STXD high impedance — 15.0 ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 133 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 103. SSI Transmitter Timing with External Clock (continued) ID Parameter Min Max Unit Synchronous External Clock Operation SS44 SRXD setup before (Tx) CK falling 10.0 — ns SS45 SRXD hold after (Tx) CK falling 2.0 — ns SS46 SRXD rise/fall time — 6.0 ns • • • • • 4.7.15.4 NOTE All the timings for the SSI are given for a non-inverted serial clock polarity (TSCKP/RSCKP = 0) and a non-inverted frame sync (TFSI/RFSI = 0). If the polarity of the clock and/or the frame sync have been inverted, all the timing remains valid by inverting the clock signal STCK/SRCK and/or the frame sync STFS/SRFS shown in the tables and in the figures. All timings are on Audiomux Pads when SSI is being used for data transfer. “Tx” and “Rx” refer to the Transmit and Receive sections of the SSI. The terms WL and BL refer to Word Length (WL) and Bit Length (BL). For internal Frame Sync operation using external clock, the FS timing is same as that of Tx Data (for example, during AC97 mode of operation). SSI Receiver Timing with External Clock SS22 SS26 SS24 SS25 SS23 TXC (Input) SS28 TXFS (bl) (Input) SS30 SS32 SS34 SS35 TXFS (wl) (Input) SS41 SS40 SS36 RXD (Input) Figure 94. SSI Receiver External Clock Timing Diagram i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 134 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 104. SSI Receiver Timing with External Clock ID Parameter Min Max Unit 81.4 — ns External Clock Operation SS22 (Tx/Rx) CK clock period SS23 (Tx/Rx) CK clock high period 36 — ns SS24 (Tx/Rx) CK clock rise time — 6.0 ns SS25 (Tx/Rx) CK clock low period 36 — ns SS26 (Tx/Rx) CK clock fall time — 6.0 ns SS28 (Rx) CK high to FS (bl) high –10 15.0 ns SS30 (Rx) CK high to FS (bl) low 10 — ns SS32 (Rx) CK high to FS (wl) high –10 15.0 ns SS34 (Rx) CK high to FS (wl) low 10 — ns SS35 (Tx/Rx) External FS rise time — 6.0 ns SS36 (Tx/Rx) External FS fall time — 6.0 ns SS40 SRXD setup time before (Rx) CK low 10 — ns SS41 SRXD hold time after (Rx) CK low 2 — ns • • • • • NOTE All the timings for the SSI are given for a non-inverted serial clock polarity (TSCKP/RSCKP = 0) and a non-inverted frame sync (TFSI/RFSI = 0). If the polarity of the clock and/or the frame sync have been inverted, all the timing remains valid by inverting the clock signal STCK/SRCK and/or the frame sync STFS/SRFS shown in the tables and in the figures. All timings are on Audiomux Pads when SSI is being used for data transfer. “Tx” and “Rx” refer to the Transmit and Receive sections of the SSI. The terms WL and BL refer to Word Length (WL) and Bit Length (BL). For internal Frame Sync operation using external clock, the FS timing is same as that of Tx Data (for example, during AC97 mode of operation). i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 135 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.16 UART Table 105 shows the UART I/O configuration based on which mode is enabled. Table 105. UART I/O Configuration vs. Mode DTE Mode DCE Mode Port Direction Description Direction Description RTS Output RTS from DTE to DCE Input RTS from DTE to DCE CTS Input CTS from DCE to DTE Output CTS from DCE to DTE DTR Output DTR from DTE to DCE Input DTR from DTE to DCE DSR Input DSR from DCE to DTE Output DSR from DCE to DTE DCD Input DCD from DCE to DTE Output DCD from DCE to DTE RI Input RING from DCE to DTE Output RING from DCE to DTE TXD_MUX Input Serial data from DCE to DTE Output Serial data from DCE to DTE RXD_MUX Output Serial data from DTE to DCE Input Serial data from DTE to DCE 4.7.16.1 UART Electrical This section describes the electrical information of the UART module. 4.7.16.1.1 UART RS-232 Serial Mode Timing UART Transmitter Figure 95 depicts the transmit timing of UART in RS-232 serial mode, with 8 data bit/1 stop bit format. Table 106 lists the UART RS-232 serial mode transmit timing characteristics. Figure 95. UART RS-232 Serial Mode Transmit Timing Diagram Table 106. UART RS-232 Serial Mode Transmit Timing Diagram 1 2 ID Parameter Symbol Min Max Units UA1 Transmit Bit Time tTbit 1/Fbaud_rate1-Tref_clk2 1/Fbaud_rate+Tref_clk — 1/Fbaud_rate : Baud rate frequency. The maximum baud rate the UART can support is (ipg_perclk frequency)/16. Tref_clk: The period of UART reference clock ref_clk (ipg_perclk after RFDIV divider). i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 136 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics UART Receiver Figure 96 depicts the RS-232 serial mode receive timing, with 8 data bit/1 stop bit format. Table 107 lists serial mode receive timing characteristics. Figure 96. UART RS-232 Serial Mode Receive Timing Diagram Table 107. UART RS-232 Serial Mode Transmit Timing Diagram ID Parameter Symbol Min Max Units UA1 Receive Bit Time1 tRbit 1/Fbaud_rate2-1/(16×Fbaud_rate) 1/Fbaud_rate+1/(16×Fbaud_rate) — 1 The UART receiver can tolerate 1/(16×Fbaud_rate) tolerance in each bit. But accumulation tolerance in one frame must not exceed 3/(16×Fbaud_rate). 2 F baud_rate: Baud rate frequency. The maximum baud rate the UART can support is (ipg_perclk frequency)/16. 4.7.16.1.2 UART IrDA Mode Timing The following subsections give the UART transmit and receive timings in IrDA mode. UART IrDA Mode Transmitter Figure 97 depicts the UART IrDA mode transmit timing, with 8 data bit/1 stop bit format. Table 108 lists the transmit timing characteristics. Figure 97. UART IrDA Mode Transmit Timing Diagram Table 108. IrDA Mode Transmit Timing Parameters 1 ID Parameter Symbol Min Max Units UA3 Transmit Bit Time in IrDA mode tTIRbit 1/F baud_rate1-Tref_clk2 1/Fbaud_rate+Tref_clk — UA4 Transmit IR Pulse Duration tTIRpulse (3/16)×(1Fbaud_rate)-Tref_clk (3/16)×(1Fbaud_rate)+Tref_clk — Fbaud_rate: Baud rate frequency. The maximum baud rate the UART can support is (ipg_perclk frequency)/16. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 137 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 2 Tref_clk: The period of UART reference clock ref_clk (ipg_perclk after RFDIV divider). UART IrDA Mode Receiver Figure 98 depicts the UART IrDA mode receive timing, with 8 data bit/1 stop bit format. Table 109 lists the receive timing characteristics. Figure 98. UART IrDA Mode Receive Timing Diagram Table 109. IrDA Mode Receive Timing Parameters ID Parameter Symbol Min Max Units UA5 Receive Bit Time1 in IrDA mode tRIRbit 1/F baud_rate21/(16×Fbaud_rate) 1/F baud_rate + 1/(16×Fbaud_rate) — UA6 Receive IR Pulse Duration tRIRpulse 1.41 us (5/16)×(1/F baud_rate) — 1 The UART receiver can tolerate 1/(16×Fbaud_rate) tolerance in each bit. But accumulation tolerance in one frame must not exceed 3/(16×Fbaud_rate). 2 Fbaud_rate: Baud rate frequency. The maximum baud rate the UART can support is (ipg_perclk frequency)/16. 4.7.17 USBOH3 Parameters This section describes the electrical parameters of the USB OTG port and USB HOST ports. For on-chip USB PHY parameters see Section 4.7.19, “USB PHY Parameters.” 4.7.17.1 USB Serial Interface In order to support four serial different interfaces, the USB serial transceiver can be configured to operate in one of four modes: • DAT_SE0 bidirectional, 3-wire mode • DAT_SE0 unidirectional, 6-wire mode • VP_VM bidirectional, 4-wire mode • VP_VM unidirectional, 6-wire mode The USB controller does not support ULPI Serial mode. Only the legacy serial mode is supported. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 138 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 110. Serial Mode Signal Map for 6-pin FsLs Serial Mode Signal Maps to Direction Description tx_enable data(0) In Active high transmit enable tx_dat data(1) In Transmit differential data on D+/D– tx_se0 data(2) In Transmit single-ended zero on D+/D– int data(3) Out Active high interrupt indication Must be asserted whenever any unmasked interrupt occurs rx_dp data(4) Out Single-ended receive data from D+ rx_dm data(5) Out Single-ended receive data from D– rx_rcv data(6) Out Differential receive data from D+/D– Reserved data(7) Out Reserved The PHY must drive this signal low Table 111. Serial Mode Signal Map for 3-pin FsLs Serial Mode Signal Maps to Direction tx_enable data(0) In Active high transmit enable dat data(1) I/O Transmit differential data on D+/D– when tx_enable is high Receive differential data on D+/D– when tx_enable is low se0 data(2) I/O Transmit single-ended zero on D+/D– when tx_enable is high Receive single-ended zero on D+/D– when tx_enable is low int data(3) Out Active high interrupt indication Must be asserted whenever any unmasked interrupt occurs 4.7.17.1.1 Description USB DAT_SE0 Bi-Directional Mode Table 112. Signal Definitions—DAT_SE0 Bi-Directional Mode Name Direction Signal Description USB_TXOE_B Out Transmit enable, active low USB_DAT_VP Out In TX data when USB_TXOE_B is low Differential RX data when USB_TXOE_B is high USB_SE0_VM Out In SE0 drive when USB_TXOE_B is low SE0 RX indicator when USB_TXOE_B is high i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 139 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Transmit US3 USB_TXOE_B USB_DAT_VP USB_SE0_VM US1 US4 US2 Figure 99. USB Transmit Waveform in DAT_SE0 Bi-Directional Mode Receive USB_TXOE_B USB_DAT_VP USB_SE0_VM US7 US8 USB_SE0_VM Figure 100. USB Receive Waveform in DAT_SE0 Bi-Directional Mode Table 113. Definitions of USB Receive Waveform in DAT_SE0 Bi-Directional Mode ID Parameter Signal Name Direction Min Max Unit Conditions/ Reference Signal US1 TX Rise/Fall Time USB_DAT_VP Out – 5.0 ns 50 pF US2 TX Rise/Fall Time USB_SE0_VM Out – 5.0 ns 50 pF US3 TX Rise/Fall Time USB_TXOE_B Out – 5.0 ns 50 pF US4 TX Duty Cycle USB_DAT_VP Out 49.0 51.0 % – US7 RX Rise/Fall Time USB_DAT_VP In – 3.0 ns 35 pF US8 RX Rise/Fall Time USB_SE0_VM In – 3.0 ns 35 pF i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 140 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics 4.7.17.1.2 USB DAT_SE0 Unidirectional Mode Table 114. Signal Definitions—DAT_SE0 Unidirectional Mode Name Direction Signal Description USB_TXOE_B Out Transmit enable, active low USB_DAT_VP Out TX data when USB_TXOE_B is low USB_SE0_VM Out SE0 drive when USB_TXOE_B is low USB_VP1 In Buffered data on DP when USB_TXOE_B is high USB_VM1 In Buffered data on DM when USB_TXOE_B is high USB_RCV In Differential RX data when USB_TXOE_B is high US11 Transmit USB_TXOE_B USB_DAT_VP USB_SE0_VM US9 US12 US10 Figure 101. USB Transmit Waveform in DAT_SE0 Uni-directional Mode Receive USB_TXOE_B USB_DAT_VP USB_RCV US16 US15/US17 USB_SE0_VM Figure 102. USB Receive Waveform in DAT_SE0 Uni-directional Mode i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 141 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 115. USB Port Timing Specification in DAT_SE0 Uni-directional Mode Signal Name Signal Source Min Max Unit Condition/ Reference Signal TX Rise/Fall Time USB_DAT_VP Out – 5.0 ns 50 pF US10 TX Rise/Fall Time USB_SE0_VM Out – 5.0 ns 50 pF US11 TX Rise/Fall Time USB_TXOE_B Out – 5.0 ns 50 pF US12 TX Duty Cycle USB_DAT_VP Out 49.0 51.0 % – US15 RX Rise/Fall Time USB_VP1 In – 3.0 ns 35 pF US16 RX Rise/Fall Time USB_VM1 In – 3.0 ns 35 pF US17 RX Rise/Fall Time USB_RCV In – 3.0 ns 35 pF ID Parameter US9 4.7.17.1.3 USB VP_VM Bi-Directional Mode Table 116. Signal Definitions—VP_VM Bi-Directional Mode Name Direction Signal Description USB_TXOE_B Out USB_DAT_VP Out (Tx) In (Rx) TX VP data when USB_TXOE_B is low RX VP data when USB_TXOE_B is high USB_SE0_VM Out (Tx) In (Rx) TX VM data when USB_TXOE_B low RX VM data when USB_TXOE_B high USB_RCV In Transmit enable, active low Differential RX data Transmit US20 USB_TXOE_B USB_DAT_VP USB_SE0_VM US18 US21 US19 US22 US22 Figure 103. USB Transmit Waveform in VP_VM Bi-Directional Mode i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 142 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Receive US26 USB_DAT_VP USB_SE0_VM US27 US28 USB_RCV US29 Figure 104. USB Receive Waveform in VP_VM Bi-Directional Mode Table 117. USB Port Timing Specification in VP_VM Bi-directional Mode ID Parameter Signal Name Direction Min Max Unit Condition / Reference Signal US18 TX Rise/Fall Time USB_DAT_VP Out — 5.0 ns 50 pF US19 TX Rise/Fall Time USB_SE0_VM Out — 5.0 ns 50 pF US20 TX Rise/Fall Time USB_TXOE_B Out — 5.0 ns 50 pF US21 TX Duty Cycle USB_DAT_VP Out 49.0 51.0 % — US22 TX Overlap USB_SE0_VM Out –3.0 3.0 ns USB_DAT_VP US26 RX Rise/Fall Time USB_DAT_VP In — 3.0 ns 35 pF US27 RX Rise/Fall Time USB_SE0_VM In — 3.0 ns 35 pF US28 RX Skew USB_DAT_VP In –4.0 4.0 ns USB_SE0_VM US29 RX Skew USB_RCV In –6.0 2.0 ns USB_DAT_VP 4.7.17.1.4 USB VP_VM Uni-Directional Mode Table 118. USB Signal Definitions—VP_VM Uni-Directional Mode Name Direction Signal Description USB_TXOE_B Out Transmit enable, active low USB_DAT_VP Out TX VP data when USB_TXOE_B is low USB_SE0_VM Out TX VM data when USB_TXOE_B is low USB_VP1 In RX VP data when USB_TXOE_B is high USB_VM1 In RX VM data when USB_TXOE_B is high USB_RCV In Differential RX data i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 143 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Transmit US32 USB_TXOE_B USB_DAT_VP USB_SE0_VM US30 US33 US31 US34 US34 Figure 105. USB Transmit Waveform in VP_VM Unidirectional Mode Receive USB_TXOE_B USB_VP1 US38 USB_VM1 US40 USB_RCV US39 US41 Figure 106. USB Receive Waveform in VP_VM Unidirectional Mode i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 144 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics Table 119. USB Timing Specification in VP_VM Unidirectional Mode ID Parameter Signal Direction Min Max Unit Conditions / Reference Signal US30 TX Rise/Fall Time USB_DAT_VP Out — 5.0 ns 50 pF US31 TX Rise/Fall Time USB_SE0_VM Out — 5.0 ns 50 pF US32 TX Rise/Fall Time USB_TXOE_B Out — 5.0 ns 50 pF US33 TX Duty Cycle USB_DAT_VP Out 49.0 51.0 % — US34 TX Overlap USB_SE0_VM Out –3.0 3.0 ns USB_DAT_VP US38 RX Rise/Fall Time USB_VP1 In — 3.0 ns 35 pF US39 RX Rise/Fall Time USB_VM1 In — 3.0 ns 35 pF US40 RX Skew USB_VP1 In –4.0 4.0 ns USB_VM1 US41 RX Skew USB_RCV In –6.0 2.0 ns USB_VP1 4.7.18 USB Parallel Interface Timing Electrical and timing specifications of Parallel Interface are presented in the subsequent sections. Table 120. Signal Definitions—Parallel Interface (Normal ULPI) Name Direction Signal Description USB_Clk In Interface clock. All interface signals are synchronous to Clock. USB_Data[7:0] I/O Bi-directional data bus, driven low by the link during idle. Bus ownership is determined by Dir. USB_Dir In Direction. Control the direction of the Data bus. USB_Stp Out USB_Nxt In Stop. The link asserts this signal for 1 clock cycle to stop the data stream currently on the bus. Next. The PHY asserts this signal to throttle the data. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 145 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Electrical Characteristics USB_Clk US15 US16 USB_Dir/Nxt US15 US16 USB_Data US17 US17 USB_Stp Figure 107. USB Transmit/Receive Waveform in Parallel Mode Table 121. USB Timing Specification for ULPI Parallel Mode ID Parameter Min Max Unit Conditions / Reference Signal US15 Setup Time (Dir, Nxt in, Data in) 6 — ns 10 pF US16 Hold Time (Dir, Nxt in, Data in) 0 — ns 10 pF US17 Output delay Time (Stp out, Data out) for H3 routed to DISP2 I/O1 — 9 ns 10 pF — 11 ns 10 pF and H1 US17 1 Output delay Time (Stp out, Data out) for H2 H3 routed to NANDF I/O is recommended for Full and Low-Speed use only. 4.7.19 USB PHY Parameters 4.7.19.1 USB PHY AC Parameters Table 122. USB PHY AC Timing Parameters Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit trise 1.5Mbps 12Mbps 480Mbps 75 4 0.5 — 300 20 ns tfall 1.5Mbps 12Mbps 480Mbps 75 4 0.5 — 300 20 ns Jitter 1.5Mbps 12Mbps 480Mbps — — 10 1 0.2 ns i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 146 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments 4.7.19.2 USB PHY Additional Electrical Parameters Table 123. Additional Electrical Characteristics for USB PHY Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit –0.05 0.8 — 0.5 2.5 V Vcm DC (dc level measured at receiver connector) HS Mode LS/FS Mode Crossover Voltage LS Mode FS Mode 1.3 1.3 — 2 2 V Power supply ripple noise (analog 3.3 V) <160 MHz –50 0 50 mV Power supply ripple noise (analog 2.5 V) <1.2 MHz >1.2 MHz –10 –50 0 0 10 50 mV Power supply ripple noise (Digital 1.2) All conditions –50 0 50 mV 4.7.19.3 USB PHY System Clocking (SYSCLK) Table 124. USB PHY System Clocking Parameters Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Clock deviation — –150 — 150 ppm Rise/fall time — — — 200 ps Jitter (peak-peak) <1.2 MHz 0 — 50 ps Jitter (peak-peak) >1.2 MHz 0 — 100 ps — 40 — 60 % Duty-cycle 4.7.19.4 USB PHY Voltage Thresholds Table 125. VBUS Comparators Thresholds Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit A-Device Session Valid — 0.8 1.4 2.0 V B-Device Session Valid — 0.8 1.4 4.0 V B-Device Session End — 0.2 0.45 0.8 V VBUS Valid Comparator Threshold1 — 4.4 4.6 4.75 V 1 5 For VBUS maximum rating, see Table 11 on page 17 Package Information and Contact Assignments This section includes the contact assignment information and mechanical package drawing. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 147 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments 5.1 19 x 19 mm Package Information This section contains the outline drawing, signal assignment map, ground/power/reference ID (by ball grid location) for the 19 × 19 mm, 0.8 mm pitch package. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 148 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments 5.1.1 BGA—Case 2017, 19 x 19 mm, 0.8 mm Pitch Figure 108. 19 x 19 mm Package: Case 2017-01—0.8 mm Pitch i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 149 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments 5.1.1.1 19 x 19 mm Package Drawing Notes The following notes apply to Figure 108. 1 All dimensions in millimeters. Dimensioning and tolerancing per ASME Y14.5M-1994. 3 Maximum solder ball diameter measured parallel to Datum A. 4 Datum A, the seating plane, is determined by the spherical crowns of the solder balls. 5 Parallelism measurement shall exclude any effect of mark on top surface of package. 2 5.1.2 19 x 19 mm Signal Assignments, Power Rails, and I/O Table 126 shows the device connection list and Table 127 displays an alpha-sorted list of the signal assignments including associated power supplies. 5.1.2.1 19 x 19 mm Ground, Power, Sense, and Reference Contact Assignments Table 126 shows the device connection list for ground, power, sense, and reference contact signals alpha-sorted by name. Table 126. 19 x 19 mm Ground, Power, Sense, and Reference Contact Assignments Contact Name Contact Assignment AHVDDRGB Y18, AA18 AHVSSRGB Y19, AA19 GND A1 , A23, G5, H9, J8, J9, J10, J12, J13, J14, K8, K9, K10, K11, K12, K13, K14, L8, L9, L10, L11,L12, L13, L14, M9, M10, M11, M12, M13, M14, M15, N8, N9, N10, N11, N12, N13, N14, N15, N16, P8, P9, P10, P11, P12, P13, P14, P15, R8, R9, R10, R11,R12, R13, R14, R15, R16, T5, T16, AC1, AC21, AC23 GND_ANA_PLL_A U7 GND_ANA_PLL_B U17 GND_DIG_PLL_A T7 GND_DIG_PLL_B V18 NGND_OSC V17 NGND_TV_BACK T15 NGND_USBPHY L16 NVCC_EMI NVCC_EMI_DRAM U8, U9, U10, U11, U12, V7 H6, J6, K6, L6, M6, N6, P6, R6, T6 NVCC_HS10 M16 NVCC_HS4_1 M18 NVCC_HS4_2 N18 NVCC_HS6 M17 NVCC_I2C T14 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 150 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments Table 126. 19 x 19 mm Ground, Power, Sense, and Reference Contact Assignments (continued) Contact Name Contact Assignment NVCC_IPU2 T18 NVCC_IPU4 G16 NVCC_IPU5 H17 NVCC_IPU6 J17 NVCC_IPU7 K17 NVCC_IPU8 P18 NVCC_IPU9 R18 NVCC_NANDF_A E6, F5 NVCC_NANDF_B G9 NVCC_NANDF_C G10 NVCC_OSC W17 NVCC_PER3 U18 NVCC_PER5 G15 NVCC_PER8 H16 NVCC_PER9 H10 NVCC_PER10 H11 NVCC_PER11 G11 NVCC_PER12 G12 NVCC_PER13 G13 NVCC_PER14 U13 NVCC_PER15 H15 NVCC_PER17 G14 NVCC_SRTC_POW U14 NVCC_TV_BACK U16 NVCC_USBPHY L17 RREFEXT K19 SGND J11 SVCC H14 SVDDGP F13 TVDAC_DHVDD V16 VBUS K20 VCC VDD_ANA_PLL_A H13, J15, J16, K15, K16, L7, L15, M7, N7, N17, P7, P17, R17, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T17 V6 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 151 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments Table 126. 19 x 19 mm Ground, Power, Sense, and Reference Contact Assignments (continued) Contact Name Contact Assignment VDD_ANA_PLL_B W19 VDD_DIG_PLL_A U6 VDD_DIG_PLL_B W18 VDD_FUSE VDDA R7 G8, H8, H12, M8, P16, T13 VDDA33 L18 VDDGP F6, F7, F8, F9, F10, F11, F12, G6, G7, H7, J7, K7 VREFOUT U15 VREF R5 VREG K21 5.1.2.2 19 x 19 mm, Signal Assignments, Power Rails, and I/O Table 127 displays an alpha-sorted list of the signal assignments including power rails. Table 127. 19 x 19 mm Signal Assignments, Power Rails, and I/O Contact Name Contact Assignment Power Rail I/O Buffer Type Direction after Reset1 Configuraton after Reset1 AUD3_BB_CK C8 NVCC_PER9 GPIO Input Keeper AUD3_BB_FS A9 NVCC_PER9 GPIO Input Keeper AUD3_BB_RXD B9 NVCC_PER9 GPIO Input Keeper AUD3_BB_TXD E9 NVCC_PER9 GPIO Input Keeper BOOT_MODE0 AB21 NVCC_PER3 LVIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up BOOT_MODE1 AB22 NVCC_PER3 LVIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up CKIH1 V19 NVCC_PER3 Analog Input Analog CKIH2 AA20 NVCC_PER3 Analog Input Analog CKIL Y16 NVCC_SRTC_POW GPIO Input Standard CMOS CLK_SS AA21 NVCC_PER3 LVIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up COMP Y17 AHVDDRGB Analog Input Analog CSI1_D10 R22 NVCC_HS10 HSGPIO Input Keeper CSI1_D11 R23 NVCC_HS10 HSGPIO Input Keeper CSI1_D12 P22 NVCC_HS10 HSGPIO Input Keeper CSI1_D13 P23 NVCC_HS10 HSGPIO Input Keeper CSI1_D14 M20 NVCC_HS10 HSGPIO Input Keeper i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 152 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments Table 127. 19 x 19 mm Signal Assignments, Power Rails, and I/O (continued) Contact Name Contact Assignment Power Rail I/O Buffer Type Direction after Reset1 Configuraton after Reset1 CSI1_D15 M21 NVCC_HS10 HSGPIO Input Keeper CSI1_D16 N22 NVCC_HS10 HSGPIO Input Keeper CSI1_D17 N23 NVCC_HS10 HSGPIO Input Keeper CSI1_D18 M22 NVCC_HS10 HSGPIO Input Keeper CSI1_D19 M23 NVCC_HS10 HSGPIO Input Keeper CSI1_D8 E18 NVCC_PER8 GPIO Input Keeper CSI1_D9 A21 NVCC_PER8 GPIO Input Keeper CSI1_HSYNC A20 NVCC_PER8 GPIO Input Keeper CSI1_MCLK B20 NVCC_PER8 GPIO Input Keeper CSI1_PIXCLK F18 NVCC_PER8 GPIO Input Keeper CSI1_VSYNC G18 NVCC_PER8 GPIO Input Keeper CSI2_D12 B8 NVCC_PER9 GPIO Input Keeper CSI2_D13 C7 NVCC_PER9 GPIO Input Keeper CSI2_D14 L20 NVCC_HS4_1 HSGPIO Input Keeper CSI2_D15 L21 NVCC_HS4_1 HSGPIO Input Keeper CSI2_D16 L22 NVCC_HS4_1 HSGPIO Input Keeper CSI2_D17 L23 NVCC_HS4_1 HSGPIO Input Keeper CSI2_D18 D9 NVCC_PER9 GPIO Input Keeper CSI2_D19 A8 NVCC_PER9 GPIO Input Keeper CSI2_HSYNC C18 NVCC_PER8 GPIO Input Keeper CSI2_PIXCLK E19 NVCC_PER8 GPIO Input Keeper CSI2_VSYNC F19 NVCC_PER8 GPIO Input Keeper CSPI1_MISO C10 NVCC_PER10 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up CSPI1_MOSI D10 NVCC_PER10 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up CSPI1_RDY C9 NVCC_PER10 GPIO Input Keeper CSPI1_SCLK A10 NVCC_PER10 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up CSPI1_SS0 E10 NVCC_PER10 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up CSPI1_SS1 B10 NVCC_PER10 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up DI_GP1 H21 NVCC_IPU6 GPIO Input Keeper DI_GP2 J19 NVCC_IPU6 GPIO Input Keeper DI_GP3 H22 NVCC_IPU7 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up DI_GP4 J22 NVCC_IPU7 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 153 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments Table 127. 19 x 19 mm Signal Assignments, Power Rails, and I/O (continued) Contact Name Contact Assignment Power Rail I/O Buffer Type Direction after Reset1 Configuraton after Reset1 DI1_D0_CS U21 NVCC_IPU2 GPIO Output Low DI1_D1_CS AB23 NVCC_IPU2 GPIO Output Low DI1_DISP_CLK J18 NVCC_IPU6 GPIO Output Low DI1_PIN11 Y22 NVCC_IPU2 GPIO Output Low DI1_PIN12 AA22 NVCC_IPU2 GPIO Output Low DI1_PIN13 T20 NVCC_IPU2 GPIO Output High DI1_PIN15 H20 NVCC_IPU6 GPIO Output High DI1_PIN2 G23 NVCC_IPU6 GPIO Output High DI1_PIN3 G22 NVCC_IPU6 GPIO Output High DI2_DISP_CLK J21 NVCC_IPU7 GPIO Output High DI2_PIN2 J20 NVCC_IPU7 GPIO Output High DI2_PIN3 K18 NVCC_IPU7 GPIO Output High DI2_PIN4 H23 NVCC_IPU7 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT0 N20 NVCC_HS6 HSGPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT1 N21 NVCC_HS6 HSGPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT102 D22 NVCC_IPU4 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT112 D23 NVCC_IPU4 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT122 E21 NVCC_IPU4 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT132 F20 NVCC_IPU4 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT142 E22 NVCC_IPU4 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT152 G19 NVCC_IPU4 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT162 E23 NVCC_IPU5 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT172 F21 NVCC_IPU5 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT182 G20 NVCC_IPU5 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT192 H18 NVCC_IPU5 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT2 U22 NVCC_HS6 HSGPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT202 F23 NVCC_IPU5 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT212 H19 NVCC_IPU5 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT222 F22 NVCC_IPU5 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT232 G21 NVCC_IPU5 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT3 U23 NVCC_HS6 HSGPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT4 T22 NVCC_HS6 HSGPIO Input Keeper i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 154 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments Table 127. 19 x 19 mm Signal Assignments, Power Rails, and I/O (continued) Contact Name Contact Assignment Power Rail I/O Buffer Type Direction after Reset1 Configuraton after Reset1 DISP1_DAT5 T23 NVCC_HS6 HSGPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT62 C22 NVCC_IPU4 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT72 C23 NVCC_IPU4 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT82 D21 NVCC_IPU4 GPIO Input Keeper DISP1_DAT92 E20 NVCC_IPU4 GPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT0 R21 NVCC_IPU8 GPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT1 M19 NVCC_IPU8 GPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT10 W22 NVCC_IPU9 GPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT11 R19 NVCC_IPU9 GPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT12 Y23 NVCC_IPU9 GPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT13 T19 NVCC_IPU9 GPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT14 AA23 NVCC_IPU9 GPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT15 T21 NVCC_IPU9 GPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT2 P20 NVCC_HS4_2 HSGPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT3 P21 NVCC_HS4_2 HSGPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT4 V22 NVCC_HS4_2 HSGPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT5 V23 NVCC_HS4_2 HSGPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT6 N19 NVCC_IPU8 GPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT7 W23 NVCC_IPU8 GPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT8 P19 NVCC_IPU9 GPIO Input Keeper DISP2_DAT9 R20 NVCC_IPU9 GPIO Input Keeper DISPB2_SER_CLK AC22 NVCC_IPU2 GPIO Output High DISPB2_SER_DIN U19 NVCC_IPU2 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up DISPB2_SER_DIO V21 NVCC_IPU2 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up DISPB2_SER_RS W21 NVCC_IPU2 GPIO Output High DN K22 VDDA33 Analog Output – DP K23 VDDA33 Analog Output – DRAM_A0 AB1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_A1 AA2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_A10 V2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_A11 U4 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_A12 U2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 155 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments Table 127. 19 x 19 mm Signal Assignments, Power Rails, and I/O (continued) Contact Name Contact Assignment Power Rail I/O Buffer Type Direction after Reset1 Configuraton after Reset1 DRAM_A13 U1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_A14 T2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_A2 AA3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_A3 V5 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_A4 W4 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_A5 Y2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_A6 W3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_A7 Y1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_A8 W2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_A9 V3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_CAS V4 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_CS0 Y4 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_CS1 Y3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D0 T1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D1 R3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D10 M3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D11 M4 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D12 M1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D13 M5 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D14 L5 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D15 L4 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D16 L3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D17 L2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D18 L1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D19 K1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D2 R2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D20 K3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D21 K4 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D22 J3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D23 J4 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D24 K5 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D25 H1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 156 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments Table 127. 19 x 19 mm Signal Assignments, Power Rails, and I/O (continued) Contact Name Contact Assignment Power Rail I/O Buffer Type Direction after Reset1 Configuraton after Reset1 DRAM_D26 H2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D27 J5 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D28 G1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D29 G2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D3 R1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D30 G3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D31 G4 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D4 R4 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D5 P5 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D6 P4 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D7 N5 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D8 N2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_D9 N1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_DQM0 P3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_DQM1 M2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_DQM2 K2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_DQM3 H5 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_RAS W1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_SDCKE0 AA1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_SDCKE1 W5 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High DRAM_SDCLK T3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2CLK Output High DRAM_SDCLK_B T4 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2CLK Output High DRAM_SDQS0 P2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2CLK Output High DRAM_SDQS0_B P1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2CLK Output High DRAM_SDQS1 N4 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2CLK Output High DRAM_SDQS1_B N3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2CLK Output High DRAM_SDQS2 J1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2CLK Output High DRAM_SDQS2_B J2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2CLK Output High DRAM_SDQS3 H3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2CLK Output High DRAM_SDQS3_B H4 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2CLK Output High DRAM_SDWE U5 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High EIM_A162 AA9 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 157 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments Table 127. 19 x 19 mm Signal Assignments, Power Rails, and I/O (continued) Contact Name Contact Assignment Power Rail I/O Buffer Type Direction after Reset1 Configuraton after Reset1 EIM_A172 AB9 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up EIM_A182 AC8 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up EIM_A192 AA8 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up EIM_A202 AB8 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up EIM_A212 AC7 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up EIM_A22 AB7 NVCC_EMI GPIO Output High EIM_A232 AC6 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up EIM_A24 AC5 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up EIM_A25 AB6 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up EIM_A26 AC4 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up EIM_A27 AB5 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_BCLK AA4 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_CRE AB2 NVCC_EMI GPIO Output High EIM_CS0 W6 NVCC_EMI GPIO Output High EIM_CS1 Y6 NVCC_EMI GPIO Output High EIM_CS2 Y7 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_CS3 AC3 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_CS4 AA6 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_CS5 AA5 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D16 AC12 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D17 W10 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D18 AA11 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D19 Y10 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D20 AB11 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D21 W9 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D22 AC11 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D23 V8 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D24 AA10 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D25 Y9 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D26 AB10 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D27 W8 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D28 AC10 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 158 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments Table 127. 19 x 19 mm Signal Assignments, Power Rails, and I/O (continued) Contact Name Contact Assignment Power Rail I/O Buffer Type Direction after Reset1 Configuraton after Reset1 EIM_D29 Y8 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D30 AC9 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_D31 W7 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA0 AC15 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA1 V13 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA10 AC13 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA11 V11 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA12 AA12 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA13 W11 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA14 AB12 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA15 Y11 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA2 AA14 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA3 AB14 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA4 AC14 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA5 Y13 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA6 AA13 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA7 W13 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA8 AB13 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DA9 Y12 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_DTACK Y5 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up EIM_EB0 V12 NVCC_EMI GPIO Output High EIM_EB1 W12 NVCC_EMI GPIO Output High EIM_EB2 V10 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_EB3 V9 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input Keeper EIM_LBA AC2 NVCC_EMI GPIO Output High EIM_OE AA7 NVCC_EMI GPIO Output High EIM_RW AB3 NVCC_EMI GPIO Output High EIM_SDBA0 V1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High EIM_SDBA1 U3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High EIM_SDBA2 F1 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High EIM_SDODT0 F3 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High EIM_SDODT1 F2 NVCC_EMI_DRAM DDR2 Output High i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 159 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments Table 127. 19 x 19 mm Signal Assignments, Power Rails, and I/O (continued) Contact Name Contact Assignment Power Rail I/O Buffer Type Direction after Reset1 Configuraton after Reset1 EIM_WAIT AB4 NVCC_EMI GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up EXTAL AB20 NVCC_OSC Analog Input – FASTR_ANA W20 NVCC_PER3 – Input – FASTR_DIG Y20 NVCC_PER3 – Input – GPANAIO J23 NVCC_USBPHY Analog Output – GPIO_NAND D5 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up GPIO1_0 B21 NVCC_PER5 GPIO Input Keeper GPIO1_1 D20 NVCC_PER5 GPIO Input Keeper GPIO1_2 A22 NVCC_PER5 GPIO Input Keeper GPIO1_3 D18 NVCC_PER5 GPIO Input Keeper GPIO1_4 B22 NVCC_PER5 GPIO Input Keeper GPIO1_5 D19 NVCC_PER5 GPIO Input Keeper GPIO1_6 C19 NVCC_PER5 GPIO Input Keeper GPIO1_7 B23 NVCC_PER5 GPIO Input Keeper GPIO1_8 C21 NVCC_PER5 GPIO Input Keeper GPIO1_9 C20 NVCC_PER5 GPIO Input Keeper I2C1_CLK W15 NVCC_I2C I2CIO Input 47 kΩ pull-up I2C1_DAT AB16 NVCC_I2C I2CIO Input 47 kΩ pull-up ID L19 NVCC_USBPHY Analog Input Pull-up IOB AC19 AHVDDRGB Analog Output — IOB_BACK AB19 — Analog Output — IOG AC18 AHVDDRGB Analog Output — IOG_BACK AB18 — Analog Output — IOR AC17 AHVDDRGB Analog Output — IOR_BACK AB17 — Analog Output — JTAG_DE_B AB15 NVCC_PER14 GPIO Input/Open-drain output 47 kΩ pull-up JTAG_MOD V14 NVCC_PER14 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-down JTAG_TCK V15 NVCC_PER14 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-down JTAG_TDI Y14 NVCC_PER14 GPIO Input 47 kΩ pull-up JTAG_TDO AA15 NVCC_PER14 GPIO 3-state output Keeper JTAG_TMS AC16 NVCC_PER14 GPIO Input 47 kΩ pull-up i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 160 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments Table 127. 19 x 19 mm Signal Assignments, Power Rails, and I/O (continued) Contact Name Contact Assignment Power Rail I/O Buffer Type Direction after Reset1 Configuraton after Reset1 JTAG_TRSTB W14 NVCC_PER14 GPIO Input 47 kΩ pull-up KEY_COL0 E15 NVCC_PER13 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up KEY_COL1 A16 NVCC_PER13 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up KEY_COL2 D15 NVCC_PER13 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up KEY_COL33 B17 NVCC_PER13 GPIO Output High KEY_COL43 F16 NVCC_PER13 GPIO Output Low KEY_COL53 C16 NVCC_PER13 GPIO Output Low KEY_ROW0 D14 NVCC_PER13 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up KEY_ROW1 B16 NVCC_PER13 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up KEY_ROW2 F15 NVCC_PER13 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up KEY_ROW3 C15 NVCC_PER13 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up NANDF_ALE E3 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Output High NANDF_CLE F4 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Output High NANDF_CS0 C3 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Output High NANDF_CS1 C2 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Output High NANDF_CS2 E4 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Output High NANDF_CS3 B1 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Output High NANDF_CS4 B2 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Output Low NANDF_CS5 A2 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Output Low NANDF_CS6 E5 NVCC_NANDF_B UHVIO Output Low NANDF_CS7 C4 NVCC_NANDF_B UHVIO Output Low NANDF_D0 A7 NVCC_NANDF_C UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_D1 E8 NVCC_NANDF_C UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_D10 B5 NVCC_NANDF_B UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_D11 D7 NVCC_NANDF_B UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_D12 C5 NVCC_NANDF_B UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_D13 A3 NVCC_NANDF_B UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_D14 B4 NVCC_NANDF_B UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_D15 D6 NVCC_NANDF_B UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_D2 A6 NVCC_NANDF_C UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_D3 D8 NVCC_NANDF_C UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_D4 B7 NVCC_NANDF_C UHVIO Input Keeper i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 161 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments Table 127. 19 x 19 mm Signal Assignments, Power Rails, and I/O (continued) Contact Name Contact Assignment Power Rail I/O Buffer Type Direction after Reset1 Configuraton after Reset1 NANDF_D5 A5 NVCC_NANDF_C UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_D6 B6 NVCC_NANDF_C UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_D7 C6 NVCC_NANDF_B UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_D8 A4 NVCC_NANDF_B UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_D9 E7 NVCC_NANDF_B UHVIO Input Keeper NANDF_RB0 D2 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up NANDF_RB1 D4 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up NANDF_RB2 D3 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up NANDF_RB3 C1 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up NANDF_RDY_INT B3 NVCC_NANDF_B UHVIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up NANDF_RE_B E2 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Output — NANDF_WE_B E1 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Output — NANDF_WP_B D1 NVCC_NANDF_A UHVIO Output — OWIRE_LINE E14 NVCC_PER12 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up PMIC_INT_REQ AA16 NVCC_SRTC_POW GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up PMIC_ON_REQ W16 NVCC_SRTC_POW GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up PMIC_RDY AA17 NVCC_SRTC_POW GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up PMIC_STBY_REQ Y15 NVCC_SRTC_POW GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up POR_B U20 NVCC_PER3 LVIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up RESET_IN_B Y21 NVCC_PER3 LVIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up SD1_CLK A17 NVCC_PER15 UHVIO Output — SD1_CMD E16 NVCC_PER15 UHVIO Input 47 kΩ pull-up SD1_DATA0 D16 NVCC_PER15 UHVIO Input 47 kΩ pull-up SD1_DATA1 A18 NVCC_PER15 UHVIO Input 47 kΩ pull-up SD1_DATA2 F17 NVCC_PER15 UHVIO Input 47 kΩ pull-up SD1_DATA3 A19 NVCC_PER15 UHVIO Input 360 kΩ pull-down SD2_CLK B18 NVCC_PER17 UHVIO Output — SD2_CMD G17 NVCC_PER17 UHVIO Input 47 kΩ pull-up SD2_DATA0 E17 NVCC_PER17 UHVIO Input 47 kΩ pull-up SD2_DATA1 B19 NVCC_PER17 UHVIO Input 47 kΩ pull-up SD2_DATA2 D17 NVCC_PER17 UHVIO Input 47 kΩ pull-up SD2_DATA3 C17 NVCC_PER17 UHVIO Input 360 kΩ pull-down i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 162 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments Table 127. 19 x 19 mm Signal Assignments, Power Rails, and I/O (continued) Direction after Reset1 Configuraton after Reset1 — — GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-down NVVCC_PER12 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up D13 NVVCC_PER12 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up UART1_RXD E13 NVVCC_PER12 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up UART1_TXD A13 NVVCC_PER12 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up UART2_RXD A14 NVVCC_PER12 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up UART2_TXD C14 NVVCC_PER12 GPIO Input 100 kΩ pull-up UART3_RXD F14 NVVCC_PER12 GPIO Input Keeper UART3_TXD B15 NVVCC_PER12 GPIO Input Keeper USBH1_CLK D11 NVCC_PER11 GPIO Input Keeper USBH1_DATA0 E12 NVCC_PER11 GPIO Input Keeper USBH1_DATA1 A11 NVCC_PER11 GPIO Input Keeper USBH1_DATA2 B12 NVCC_PER11 GPIO Input Keeper USBH1_DATA3 C12 NVCC_PER11 GPIO Input Keeper USBH1_DATA4 D12 NVCC_PER11 GPIO Input Keeper USBH1_DATA5 A12 NVCC_PER11 GPIO Input Keeper USBH1_DATA6 B13 NVCC_PER11 GPIO Input Keeper USBH1_DATA7 C13 NVCC_PER11 GPIO Input Keeper USBH1_DIR B11 NVCC_PER11 GPIO Input Keeper USBH1_NXT C11 NVCC_PER11 GPIO Input Keeper USBH1_STP E11 NVCC_PER11 GPIO Input Keeper XTAL AC20 NVCC_OSC Analog Output — Contact Name Contact Assignment Power Rail STR A15 NVCC_PER12 TEST_MODE V20 NVCC_PER3 UART1_CTS B14 UART1_RTS I/O Buffer Type 1 The state immediately after reset and before ROM firmware or software has executed. During power-on reset this port acts as input for fuse override signal. See Table 128 on page 164 for details 3 During power-on reset this port acts as output for diagnostic signal. See Table 128 on page 164 for details 2 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 163 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments 5.1.2.3 Fuse Override Considerations Table 128 lists the contacts that can be overridden with fuse settings. Table 128. Fuse Override Contacts Contact name Direction After Reset Configuration After Reset DISP1_DAT10 Input Keeper BT_SPARE_SIZE 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT11 Input Keeper BT_LPB_FREQ[2] 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT12 Input Keeper BT_MLC_SEL 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT13 Input Keeper BT_MEM_CTL[0] 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT14 Input Keeper BT_MEM_CTL[1] 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT15 Input Keeper BT_BUS_WIDTH 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT16 Input Keeper BT_PAGE_SIZE[0] 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT17 Input Keeper BT_PAGE_SIZE[1] 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT18 Input Keeper BT_WEIM_MUXED[0] 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT19 Input Keeper BT_WEIM_MUXED[1] 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT20 Input Keeper BT_MEM_TYPE[0] 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT21 Input Keeper BT_MEM_TYPE[1] 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT22 Input Keeper BT_LPB_FREQ[0] 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT23 Input Keeper BT_LPB_FREQ[1] 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT6 Input Keeper BT_USB_SRC 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT7 Input Keeper BT_EEPROM_CFG 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT8 Input Keeper BT_SRC[0] 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down DISP1_DAT9 Input Keeper BT_SRC[1] 4.7 kΩ pull-up or pull-down EIM_A16 Input 100 kΩ pull-up OSC_FREQ_SEL[0] 4.7 kΩ pull-down or none for high level2 EIM_A17 Input 100 kΩ pull-up OSC_FREQ_SEL[1] 4.7 kΩ pull-down or none for high level2 EIM_A18 Input 100 kΩ pull-up BT_LPB[0] 4.7 kΩ pull-down or none for high level2 EIM_A19 Input 100 kΩ pull-up BT_LPB[1] 4.7 kΩ pull-down or none for high level2 EIM_A20 Input 100 kΩ pull-up BT_UART_SRC[0] 4.7 kΩ pull-down or none for high level2 EIM_A21 Input 100 kΩ pull-up BT_UART_SRC[1] 4.7 kΩ pull-down or none for high level2 EIM_A23 Input 100 kΩ pull-up No longer used; formerly BT_HPN_EN. none KEY_COL3 Output High Signal Configuration1 External Termination for Fuse Override Output for diagnostic signal INT_BOOT during power-on reset i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 164 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Package Information and Contact Assignments Table 128. Fuse Override Contacts (continued) Contact name Direction After Reset Configuration After Reset Signal Configuration1 KEY_COL4 Output Low Output for diagnostic signal ANY_PU_RST during power-on reset KEY_COL5 Output Low Output for diagnostic signal JTAG_ACT during power-on reset External Termination for Fuse Override 1 Signal Configuration as Fuse Override Input at Power Up. These are special I/O lines that control the boot up configuration during product development. In production, the boot configuration is controlled by fuses. 2 Consider using an external 68 kΩ pull-up if system constraints indicate that the on-chip 100 kΩ pull-up is too weak. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 165 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 F 13 DISP1_DAT20 GPIO1_2 GPIO1_4 DISP1_DAT6 DISP1_DAT10 DISP1_DAT14 DISP1_DAT22 CSI1_D9 GPIO1_0 GPIO1_8 DISP1_DAT8 DISP1_DAT12 DISP1_DAT17 CSI1_HSYNC CSI1_MCLK GPIO1_9 GPIO1_1 DISP1_DAT9 DISP1_DAT13 SD1_DATA3 SD2_DATA1 GPIO1_6 GPIO1_5 CSI2_PIXCLK CSI2_VSYNC SD1_DATA1 SD2_CLK CSI2_HSYNC GPIO1_3 CSI1_D8 CSI1_PIXCLK SD1_CLK KEY_COL3 SD2_DATA3 SD2_DATA2 SD2_DATA0 SD1_DATA2 KEY_COL1 KEY_ROW1 KEY_COL5 SD1_DATA0 SD1_CMD KEY_COL4 STR UART3_TXD KEY_ROW3 KEY_COL2 KEY_COL0 KEY_ROW2 UART2_RXD UART1_CTS UART2_TXD KEY_ROW0 OWIRE_LINE UART3_RXD UART1_TXD USBH1_DATA6 USBH1_DATA7 UART1_RTS UART1_RXD SVDDGP USBH1_DATA5 USBH1_DATA2 USBH1_DATA3 USBH1_DATA4 USBH1_DATA0 VDDGP USBH1_DATA1 USBH1_DIR USBH1_NXT USBH1_CLK USBH1_STP VDDGP CSPI1_SCLK CSPI1_SS1 CSPI1_MISO CSPI1_MOSI CSPI1_SS0 VDDGP AUD3_BB_FS AUD3_BB_RXD CSPI1_RDY CSI2_D18 AUD3_BB_TXD VDDGP CSI2_D19 CSI2_D12 AUD3_BB_CK NANDF_D3 NANDF_D1 VDDGP NANDF_D0 NANDF_D4 CSI2_D13 NANDF_D11 NANDF_D9 VDDGP NANDF_D2 NANDF_D6 NANDF_D7 NANDF_D15 NVCC_NANDF_A VDDGP NANDF_D5 NANDF_D10 NANDF_D12 GPIO_NAND NANDF_CS6 NVCC_NANDF_A NANDF_D8 NANDF_D14 NANDF_CS7 NANDF_RB1 NANDF_CS2 NANDF_CLE NANDF_D13 NANDF_RDY_INT NANDF_CS0 NANDF_RB2 NANDF_ALE EIM_SDODT0 NANDF_CS5 NANDF_CS4 NANDF_CS1 NANDF_RB0 NANDF_RE_B EIM_SDODT1 GND NANDF_CS3 NANDF_RB3 NANDF_WP_B NANDF_WE_B EIM_SDBA2 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 F 14 E 15 DISP1_DAT16 E Table 129. 19 × 19 mm, 0.8 Pitch Ball Map Table 129 shows the 19 × 19 mm, 0.8 pitch ball map. 5.2 19 x 19 mm, 0.8 Pitch Ball Map 16 D 17 DISP1_DAT11 D 18 C 19 DISP1_DAT7 C 20 B 21 GPIO1_7 B 22 GND A 23 A Package Information and Contact Assignments i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 166 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 CSI2_D17 DI1_PIN3 DI_GP3 DI_GP4 DN CSI2_D16 DISP1_DAT23 DI_GP1 DI2_DISP_CLK VREG CSI2_D15 DISP1_DAT18 DI1_PIN15 DI2_PIN2 VBUS CSI2_D14 DISP1_DAT15 DISP1_DAT21 DI_GP2 RREFEXT ID CSI1_VSYNC DISP1_DAT19 DI1_DISP_CLK DI2_PIN3 VDDA33 SD2_CMD NVCC_IPU5 NVCC_IPU6 NVCC_IPU7 NVCC_USBPHY NVCC_IPU4 NVCC_PER8 VCC VCC NGND_USBPHY NVCC_PER5 NVCC_PER15 VCC VCC VCC NVCC_PER17 SVCC GND GND GND NVCC_PER13 VCC GND GND GND NVCC_PER12 VDDA GND GND GND NVCC_PER11 NVCC_PER10 SGND GND GND NVCC_NANDF_C NVCC_PER9 GND GND GND NVCC_NANDF_B GND GND GND GND VDDA VDDA GND GND GND VDDGP VDDGP VDDGP VDDGP VCC VDDGP 23 22 21 20 19 18 DRAM_DQM3 DRAM_D27 DRAM_D24 DRAM_D14 DRAM_D31 DRAM_SDQS3_B DRAM_D23 DRAM_D21 DRAM_D15 DRAM_D30 DRAM_SDQS3 DRAM_D22 DRAM_D20 DRAM_D16 DRAM_D29 DRAM_D26 DRAM_SDQS2_B DRAM_DQM2 DRAM_D17 DRAM_D28 DRAM_D25 DRAM_SDQS2 DRAM_D19 DRAM_D18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 NVCC_EMI_DRAM NVCC_EMI_DRAM NVCC_EMI_DRAM NVCC_EMI_DRAM GND G 1 L 16 DP L Table 129. 19 × 19 mm, 0.8 Pitch Ball Map (continued) 17 K 18 GPANAIO K 19 J 20 DI2_PIN4 J 21 H 22 DI1_PIN2 H 23 G Package Information and Contact Assignments 6 5 4 3 2 1 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 167 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 DISP1_DAT3 CSI1_D18 CSI1_D16 CSI1_D12 CSI1_D10 DISP1_DAT4 DISP1_DAT2 CSI1_D15 DISP1_DAT1 DISP2_DAT3 DISP2_DAT0 DISP2_DAT15 DI1_D0_CS CSI1_D14 DISP1_DAT0 DISP2_DAT2 DISP2_DAT9 DI1_PIN13 POR_B DISP2_DAT1 DISP2_DAT6 DISP2_DAT8 DISP2_DAT11 DISP2_DAT13 DISPB2_SER_DIN NVCC_HS4_1 NVCC_HS4_2 NVCC_IPU8 NVCC_IPU9 NVCC_IPU2 NVCC_PER3 NVCC_HS6 VCC VCC VCC VCC GND_ANA_PLL_B NVCC_HS10 GND VDDA GND GND NVCC_TV_BACK GND GND GND GND NGND_TV_BACK VREFOUT GND GND GND GND NVCC_I2C NVCC_SRTC_POW GND GND GND GND VDDA NVCC_PER14 GND GND GND GND VCC NVCC_EMI GND GND GND GND VCC NVCC_EMI GND GND GND GND VCC NVCC_EMI GND GND GND GND VCC NVCC_EMI VDDA GND GND GND VCC NVCC_EMI VCC VCC VCC VDD_FUSE GND_DIG_PLL_A GND_ANA_PLL_A NVCC_EMI_DRAM NVCC_EMI_DRAM NVCC_EMI_DRAM NVCC_EMI_DRAM NVCC_EMI_DRAM VDD_DIG_PLL_A DRAM_D13 DRAM_D7 DRAM_D5 VREF GND DRAM_SDWE DRAM_D11 DRAM_SDQS1 DRAM_D6 DRAM_D4 DRAM_SDCLK_B DRAM_A11 DRAM_D10 DRAM_SDQS1_B DRAM_DQM0 DRAM_D1 DRAM_SDCLK EIM_SDBA1 DRAM_DQM1 DRAM_D8 DRAM_SDQS0 DRAM_D2 DRAM_A14 DRAM_A12 DRAM_D12 DRAM_D9 DRAM_SDQS0_B DRAM_D3 DRAM_D0 DRAM_A13 M 1 U 14 DISP1_DAT5 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 U 15 T 16 CSI1_D11 T Table 129. 19 × 19 mm, 0.8 Pitch Ball Map (continued) 17 R 18 CSI1_D13 R 19 P 20 CSI1_D17 P 21 N 22 CSI1_D19 N 23 M Package Information and Contact Assignments i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 168 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 GND DISP2_DAT4 DISP2_DAT10 DI1_PIN11 DI1_PIN12 DISPB2_SER_DIO DISPB2_SER_RS RESET_IN_B CLK_SS BOOT_MODE0 GND TEST_MODE FASTR_ANA FASTR_DIG CKIH2 EXTAL XTAL CKIH1 VDD_ANA_PLL_B AHVSSRGB AHVSSRGB IOB_BACK IOB GND_DIG_PLL_B VDD_DIG_PLL_B AHVDDRGB AHVDDRGB IOG_BACK IOG NGND_OSC NVCC_OSC COMP PMIC_RDY IOR_BACK IOR TVDAC_DHVDD PMIC_ON_REQ CKIL PMIC_INT_REQ I2C1_DAT JTAG_TMS JTAG_TCK I2C1_CLK PMIC_STBY_REQ JTAG_TDO JTAG_DE_B EIM_DA0 JTAG_MOD JTAG_TRSTB JTAG_TDI EIM_DA2 EIM_DA3 EIM_DA4 EIM_DA1 EIM_DA7 EIM_DA5 EIM_DA6 EIM_DA8 EIM_DA10 EIM_EB0 EIM_EB1 EIM_DA9 EIM_DA12 EIM_DA14 EIM_D16 EIM_DA11 EIM_DA13 EIM_DA15 EIM_D18 EIM_D20 EIM_D22 EIM_EB2 EIM_D17 EIM_D19 EIM_D24 EIM_D26 EIM_D28 EIM_EB3 EIM_D21 EIM_D25 EIM_A16 EIM_A17 EIM_D30 EIM_D23 EIM_D27 EIM_D29 EIM_A19 EIM_A20 EIM_A18 NVCC_EMI EIM_D31 EIM_CS2 EIM_OE EIM_A22 EIM_A21 VDD_ANA_PLL_A EIM_CS0 EIM_CS1 EIM_CS4 EIM_A25 EIM_A23 DRAM_A3 DRAM_SDCKE1 EIM_DTACK EIM_CS5 EIM_A27 EIM_A24 DRAM_CAS DRAM_A4 DRAM_CS0 EIM_BCLK EIM_WAIT EIM_A26 DRAM_A9 DRAM_A6 DRAM_CS1 DRAM_A2 EIM_RW EIM_CS3 DRAM_A10 DRAM_A8 DRAM_A5 DRAM_A1 EIM_CRE EIM_LBA EIM_SDBA0 DRAM_RAS DRAM_A7 DRAM_SDCKE0 DRAM_A0 GND V 1 A C 14 DI1_D1_CS A C 15 A B 16 DISP2_DAT14 A B Table 129. 19 × 19 mm, 0.8 Pitch Ball Map (continued) 17 A A 18 DISP2_DAT12 A A 19 Y 20 DISP2_DAT7 Y 21 W 22 DISP2_DAT5 W 23 V Package Information and Contact Assignments 23 BOOT_MODE1 DISPB2_SER_CLK 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 169 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Revision History 6 Revision History Table 130 provides a revision history for this data sheet. 2 Table 130. i.MX51 Data Sheet Document Revision History Rev. Number Date 1 10/30/2009 Initial public release. 2 05/28/2010 • • • • • Substantive Change(s) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Changed the VREFOUT column in Table 3, "Special Signal Considerations," on page 11. Added Section 3, “IOMUX Configuration for Boot Media”. Updated Figure 2, "Power-Up Sequence," on page 22. Added a note in Section 4.2.1, “Power-Up Sequence”. Updated Section , “For more information on power up, see i.MX51 Power-Up Sequence (AN4053)”. Changed the Input current (47 kΩ Pull-up) coulmn in Table 21, "UHVIO DC Electrical Characteristics," on page 25 to Input current (75 kO Pull-up). Added new table for parameters for DDR2 Pad output buffer Impedance. Refer to Table 26, "DDR2 I/O Output Buffer Impedance HVE = 0," on page 29. Added new section under Section 4.5, “I/O AC Parameters”. See Section 4.5.4, “AC Electrical Characteristics for DDR2”. Updated Table 46, "CAMP Electrical Parameters (CKIH1, CKIH2)," on page 45. In the VIH (for square wave input) parameter, the minimum frequency was changed to NVCC_PER3 - 0.25V and the maximum frequency was changed to NVCC_PER3. Added a note in Section 4.6.6, “NAND Flash Controller (NFC) Parameters” after Table 48. Updated Asymmetric Mode Min, Symmetric Mode Min, and Max columns of Table 49. Removed Conditions parameters of the Full scale output voltage row in Table 81. Updated Section 4.7.11, “P-ATA Timing Parameters”. Replaced ATA/ATAPI-6 specification with ATA/ATAPI-5 specification. In Table 101, "SSI Transmitter Timing with Internal Clock," on page 129, under the Synchronous Internal Clock Operation sections for the ID SS42, minimum frequency was changed from 10.0 to 30. In Table 102, "SSI Receiver Timing with Internal Clock," on page 131, under the Internal Clock Operation section for ID SS20, minimum frequency was changed from 10.0 to 30. In Table 103, "SSI Transmitter Timing with External Clock," on page 133, under the External Clock Operation section for ID SS38, maximum frequency was changed from 15.0 to 30. Added a new section Section 4.7.16.1, “UART Electrical”, under Section 4.7.16, “UART”. In Table 117, "USB Port Timing Specification in VP_VM Bi-directional Mode," on page 143, for IDs SS28 and SS29, direction was changed from out to in. In Table 119, "USB Timing Specification in VP_VM Unidirectional Mode," on page 145, for IDs US40 and US41, direction was changed from out to in and the reference signal was changed to USB_VM1 and USB_VP1 respectively. In Table 121, "USB Timing Specification for ULPI Parallel Mode," on page 146, added an extra row for for ID17. Updated Signal and Direction columns in Table 119, "USB Timing Specification in VP_VM Unidirectional Mode," on page 145. Updated Signal names in Table 117, "USB Port Timing Specification in VP_VM Bi-directional Mode," on page 143. i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 170 Freescale Semiconductor Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK i.MX51A Automotive and Infotainment Applications Processors, Rev. 2 Freescale Semiconductor 171 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice How to Reach Us: Home Page: www.freescale.com Web Support: http://www.freescale.com/support USA/Europe or Locations Not Listed: Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. Technical Information Center, EL516 2100 East Elliot Road Tempe, Arizona 85284 1-800-521-6274 or +1-480-768-2130 www.freescale.com/support Europe, Middle East, and Africa: Freescale Halbleiter Deutschland GmbH Technical Information Center Schatzbogen 7 81829 Muenchen, Germany +44 1296 380 456 (English) +46 8 52200080 (English) +49 89 92103 559 (German) +33 1 69 35 48 48 (French) www.freescale.com/support Japan: Freescale Semiconductor Japan Ltd. Headquarters ARCO Tower 15F 1-8-1, Shimo-Meguro, Meguro-ku Tokyo 153-0064 Japan 0120 191014 or +81 3 5437 9125 [email protected] Asia/Pacific: Freescale Semiconductor China Ltd. Exchange Building 23F No. 118 Jianguo Road Chaoyang District Beijing 100022 China +86 10 5879 8000 [email protected] For Literature Requests Only: Freescale Semiconductor Literature Distribution Center 1-800 441-2447 or +1-303-675-2140 Fax: +1-303-675-2150 LDCForFreescaleSemiconductor @hibbertgroup.com Document Number: IMX51AEC Rev. 2 06/2010 Preliminary—Subject to Change Without Notice Information in this document is provided solely to enable system and software implementers to use Freescale Semiconductor products. There are no express or implied copyright licenses granted hereunder to design or fabricate any integrated circuits or integrated circuits based on the information in this document. Freescale Semiconductor reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein. Freescale Semiconductor makes no warranty, representation or guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for any particular purpose, nor does Freescale Semiconductor assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit, and specifically disclaims any and all liability, including without limitation consequential or incidental damages. “Typical” parameters that may be provided in Freescale Semiconductor data sheets and/or specifications can and do vary in different applications and actual performance may vary over time. All operating parameters, including “Typicals”, must be validated for each customer application by customer’s technical experts. Freescale Semiconductor does not convey any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Freescale Semiconductor products are not designed, intended, or authorized for use as components in systems intended for surgical implant into the body, or other applications intended to support or sustain life, or for any other application in which the failure of the Freescale Semiconductor product could create a situation where personal injury or death may occur. Should Buyer purchase or use Freescale Semiconductor products for any such unintended or unauthorized application, Buyer shall indemnify and hold Freescale Semiconductor and its officers, employees, subsidiaries, affiliates, and distributors harmless against all claims, costs, damages, and expenses, and reasonable attorney fees arising out of, directly or indirectly, any claim of personal injury or death associated with such unintended or unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges that Freescale Semiconductor was negligent regarding the design or manufacture of the part. RoHS-compliant and/or Pb-free versions of Freescale products have the functionality and electrical characteristics as their non-RoHS-compliant and/or non-Pb-free counterparts. For further information, see http://www.freescale.com or contact your Freescale sales representative. For information on Freescale’s Environmental Products program, go to http://www.freescale.com/epp. Freescale™ and the Freescale logo are trademarks of Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. ARM is the registered trademark of ARM Limited. ARM7TDMI-S and ARM Cortex A8 are trademarks of ARM Limited. © Freescale Semiconductor, Inc., 2009-2010. All rights reserved.